Nortel Circuit Card manuel d'utilisation

Nortel Commu nication Serve r 1000 Nortel Commu nication Server 1000 Release 4 .5 Circuit Card Description and Installation Document Number: 553-3001-2 11 Document Release: Standard 3.00 Date: August 2005 Y ear Publish FCC TM Cop yright © N or tel Networks Limite d 2005 All Rights Reser v ed Produced in Canada Inf or mation is subject to change wi[...]

[...]

Page 3 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 4 Revision history August 2005 Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support Com munication Server 1000 Release 4.5. September 2004 Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Com munication Server 1000 Release 4.0. October 2003 Standard 1.00. This document is a new NTP for Succession[...]

Page 4 of 906 Revision history 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 5 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 18 Contents LIst of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Applicable systems . . . . .[...]

Page 6 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Acceptance tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 [...]

Contents Page 7 of 90 6 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC414 Network card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trun k card s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 QPC528 CO[...]

Page 8 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Front panel connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Contents Page 9 of 90 6 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/P RI2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 P[...]

Page 10 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT6D80 MSDL card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 [...]

Contents Page 11 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Upgrading systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards . . . . . . . . 527 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Introduction .[...]

Page 12 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Cont[...]

Contents Page 13 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 NTAG26 XMFR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6[...]

Page 14 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Ph[...]

Contents Page 15 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 Download operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 16 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Contents Page 17 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuring the QSDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 The TDS/DTR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Conten[...]

Page 18 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 19 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 20 LIst of procedures Procedure 1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Procedure 2 Testing conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Procedure 3 Testing digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9[...]

Page 20 of 906 LIst of procedures 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Procedure 11 Connecting to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Procedure 12 Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Procedure 13 Connecting two or more LEIs[...]

Page 21 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 26 About this document This document is a global document. Co ntact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that th e hardware and software described are supported in your area. Subject This document outlines the functio ns , specifications, applications, and operation of[...]

Page 22 of 906 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 information about system messages, see the Software Input/O utput: System Messages (553-3001-411). Note on legacy products an d releases This NTP contains information about sy stems, components, and features that are compatible with Nortel Communicat ion Server 1000 Release 4[...]

About this document Page 23 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation System migratio n When particular Meridian 1 syst ems are upgraded to run CS 1000 Release 4.5 software and configured to include a Signaling Server, they become CS 1000M systems. Table 1 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade pat h to a CS 1000M system. For [...]

Page 24 of 906 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Conventions Terminology In this document, the follo wing syst ems are referred to generically as “system”: • Communication Server 1000 S (CS 1000S) • Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M ) • Communication Server 1000 E (CS 1000E) •M e r i d i a n 1 The following s[...]

About this document Page 25 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Related information This section lists informatio n sources that relate to this document. NTPs The following NTPs are referenced in this document: • Meridian Link ISD N/AP Gener al Guide (553-2901-100) • Spares Planning (553 -3001-153) • Equipment Identification (553[...]

Page 26 of 906 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 CD-ROM To obtain Nortel documentation on CD -ROM, contact your Nortel customer representative.[...]

Page 27 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 78 Overview Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30[...]

Page 28 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Line cards The following line cards are designed using the Intellig ent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) arch itecture and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 2 lists the line card characteristics. Ta b l [...]

Overview Page 29 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT1R20 Off-Premise St ation Analog Line car d The NT1R20 Off-Premise St ation (OPS) An alog Line card i s an intelligent eight-channel analog line card designed to be used wit h 2-wire analog terminal equipment su ch as analog (500/2500-ty pe) telephones and analog modems. Each line [...]

Page 30 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D09 analog message waiting line car d The NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card is an intelligent 16 -channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500 -type) telephones, m odems, and key systems. This card can also provide a high[...]

Overview Page 31 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When installing line cards, follow these general procedures: • Configure the jump ers and switches on the line card (if any) to meet system needs. • Install the line card into the selected slot. • Install the cable that connects th e backplane connector on the IPE module to the[...]

Page 32 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • configure the card according to inst ructions issued by the system • report back to the system information such as car d identifi cation (type, vintage, and serial number), fi rmware version, and programmed configuration status) Intelligent Peri pheral Equipment IPE line cards all[...]

Overview Page 33 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • ringing signal on/o ff • message waiting lamp on/off Maintenance data is data relating to the con figuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. So me examples of mai ntenance data include: • polling • reporting of self-test status • CP ini[...]

Page 34 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 2 Typical IPE analog line card architecture Inp ut/ output interface control Codec PCM Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip Ring Codec PCM Line interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame sync Card slot ad[...]

Overview Page 35 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DS-30X loops The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. I PE anal og line cards conv ert the in coming analog voice and signaling in formation to di gital form and route it to the Cal l Server over DS-30X network loop[...]

Page 36 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DS-30Y network loops exten d between controller cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipmen t (CE). They function in a mann er similar to DS-30X l oops. See Fi gure 5 on page 41 . A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslo t traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four DS-30Y network loops fo[...]

Overview Page 37 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module. Th is bus is arranged in a master/slave config uration where the controller card is the master and al l other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a uniqu[...]

Page 38 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 4 Typical analog line inte rface unit block diagram CODEC 2-wire to 4-wire conversion Line interface and protection Message waiting Variable gain filters Impedance matching transformer Balancing Network Tip Ring DS-30X or SL-1 network loop Message waiting circuit –150V dc 553-6[...]

Overview Page 39 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Coder/Decoder circuit The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law compan ding algorith[...]

Page 40 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 (nominal ) ringing vo ltage power su pply is used to prevent switching of the relay during the current peak. This el iminates switching gl itches and extends the life of the switching relay. The off-hook detection circuit mo nitors the current draw on the phone line. When the current dr[...]

Overview Page 41 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation voltage protection between th e TC M loop and the digita l line interf ace circuit. It also provides power for the digital tel ephone. To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loo p interface cannot provide the proper si gnals on the digital phone line, the sys[...]

Page 42 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 the system controller to operate the digi tal line interface circ uits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signa ling messages from the controller and return incoming call status informati on to the co ntroller over the DS-30X network loop . Analog line call operation The a[...]

Overview Page 43 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 6 Call connection sequenc e – near -end station receiving call 553-AAA1113 High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System Ground on tip/ battery on ring High-resistance loop Ground on ti[...]

Page 44 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 7 Call connection sequenc e – near-end originating call 553-AAA1114 High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System Ground on tip/ battery on ring High-resistance loop Ground on tip/ battery[...]

Overview Page 45 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Message wa iting Line cards that are equipped with the me ssage waiting feature receive notification th at a message is waiting across the Card LAN link (IPE cards). On cards that drive a message waitin g light, the light is turned on by connecting the ri ng side of the telephone lin[...]

Page 46 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 causes the line card to revert th e battery and ground signals to the no rmal state to signal that the call is complete. Hook Flash disc onnect super vision Hook flash disconnect supe rvision is only used for incoming calls that terminate at the terminal device (typi cally a Key system)[...]

Overview Page 47 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 8 Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence System High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State Ground on tip/ battery on ring High- resistance loop Ground on tip/ battery on [...]

Page 48 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 9 Hook flash disco nnect supervision sequence High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System No battery current drawn. Far-end station goes off hook and addresses (dials up) near-end station.[...]

Overview Page 49 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call operation will be described by catego rizing the operation in to the following m ain states: • Idle (on-hook) • Incoming calls • Outgoing calls • Calls disconnected by the CO • Calls disconnected by the telephone Loop Start Mode In Loop Start mode , th e A and B bits h[...]

Page 50 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Outgoing calls During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a channel is seized when the station goes off- hook. This simulates a low-resistance loop acro ss the tip and ring leads toward the lineside T1 card, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1. Th[...]

Overview Page 51 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • In order to detect distant end disc onnect for calls te rminati ng on the lineside T1 card, the hook flash feature within the SAL software must be enabled. • In order to detect distant end di sconnect for calls originating and terminating on the lineside T1 card, both the batt [...]

Page 52 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ground Start Mode In ground start mode, the A and B bits have the following meaning: Transmit from LTI:A bit = Tip ground (0=grounded, 1=no t grounded) B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed) B bit = Ring ground (0=ground ed, 1=not grounded) When a [...]

Overview Page 53 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming Calls Incoming calls to termin al equipment that is connected to the lineside T1 card can originate either from stations th at are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the pu blic switched telephone network). To provid e the ringing signal to the te rminal eq[...]

Page 54 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: By default, th e SAL feature opens the tip side for 750 m /s in loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments. • In order to detect distant end di sconnect for calls originati ng on the lineside T1 card, the “battery revers al” feature within the SAL softwa[...]

Overview Page 55 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Ground Start Restrictions If the lineside T1 card is used in gro und start mode, certai n restrictions should be considered. Because the system treat s the lines ide T1 card as a standard loop start analog line card, th e ground start operation of the lineside T1 card has operational[...]

Page 56 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Distant end disco nnect restri ctions If the SAL feature is not available in the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software, the lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) when a call has been term inated by the dist ant end. In this case, the lineside T1 ca[...]

Overview Page 57 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Voice frequency audio level The digital pad for lineside T1 card audio level is fixed fo r all types of call connection (0 dB insertion loss in both direction s), and differs from the analog line. Audio lev el adjustments, if required, must be made in the l ineside T1 terminal equip [...]

Page 58 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Nortel has tested line protection de vices from three manufacturers. See Table 6. Each manufacturer offers devices for prot ection of digital as well as analog telephone lines. These devices are compatib le with 66 type M1-50 split blocks or equivalent. Consult the dev ice manufacturer [...]

Overview Page 59 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation grounding connection req uirements as described in System install ation (553-3001-210). This requ irement incl udes connecting the ground for the protection devices to t he approved bu ilding earth ground reference. Any variances to these grounding requirem ents could limit th e func[...]

Page 60 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use Table 7 to help select the trunk card that will b est m eet system needs. NT8D14 Unive rsal Trunk card The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is an intelligen t four-chann el trunk card that is designed to be used in a var[...]

Overview Page 61 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features. NT8D15 E&M Trunk card The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card is an intelligent four-channel trunk card that is designed to be used when connecting to the followin g types of t[...]

Page 62 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 3 Install the cable that connects th e backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). 5 Connect the trunk card output to the se lected terminal e quipment at the MDF. 6 Co[...]

Overview Page 63 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Operation This section describes how trunk cards fit into th e CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 architecture, the buses that carry signals to and from the trunk cards, and how they connect to termin al equipment. See Table 8 for IPE parameters. Host interface bus Cards based on the[...]

Page 64 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 11 Typical IPE trunk card architecture Inp ut/ output interface control Codec PCM Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip Ring Codec PCM Trunk interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame sync Card slot addres[...]

Overview Page 65 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces. Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynch ronous communication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is in formation directly re l[...]

Page 66 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DS-30X loops The interfaces provided by the line an d trunk cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line and trunk cards convert the incoming analog voi ce and signaling information to digital form, and route it to the Common Equipm ent (CE) CPU o[...]

Overview Page 67 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word divid ed among 24 successive DS-30X frames. DS-30Y network loops exten d between controller cards and superloop network cards in the common equi pment, and function i n a manner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 13 on pag[...]

Page 68 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 13 Network co nnection s to IPE modules NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D01 Controller Card NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card DS-30X DS-30Y loop NT8D37 IPE Module Common Equipment (Network) NT8D13 PE Module NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card QPC414 Network Card QPC659 Dual-Loop Peripheral Buff[...]

Overview Page 69 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation link is composed of two asy nchronous serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 11 on page 64 ). The ou tput bus is used by the controller for output of control data to the trunk card. The input bus is used by the controller for in put of trunk card status data. A card L[...]

Page 70 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 trunk line through an imp edance matc hing and balance network. The trunk interface also includes th e logic necessary to place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk , or the logic t o connect to special servic es such as recorded announcement and paging equipment . Figure 14 shows a t[...]

Overview Page 71 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Variable gain f ilters Audio signals received from the analog phone trunk are passed through a low-pass A/D monolit hic filter that limits th e frequency spread of the input signal to a nomin al 200–3400 Hz ban dwidth. The audio signal is t hen applied to the input of the codec. Au[...]

Page 72 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board provides four bidirectional asynchronous serial ports for the system processor, and the QPC841 QSDI card also provides four. Any device t h at conforms to the RS-232-C serial communication standard can be c onnected to the[...]

Overview Page 73 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation not consume a module slot. The RS-23 2-C connections are brought out through special cables to the backplane I/O panel. The QPC841 Quad SDI card and the QPC513 Enhanced SDI card mount in standard backplane slots, and their se rial interface connectors are located on the card front pa[...]

Page 74 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 — Data terminal equipmen t (DTE) emulation mode — Data communication equipm ent (DCE) emulation mode • enable/disable sw itch and LED • input/output (I/O) devi ce address selectable by on-board switches. The QPC513 ESDI card provides these features: • fully synchronous serial [...]

Overview Page 75 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power consumption The SDI cards obtain their power directly from the module backplane. Power consumption for each of the cards is shown in Table 10. Environmental The SDI cards operate without degradation under the conditions listed in Table 11. Electrostati c discharge The SDI cards[...]

Page 76 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Electromagne tic interferen ce The CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meri dian 1 systems me et the requirements of FCC Part 15 and CSA C108.8 electromagnetic inte rference (EMI) standards as a class “A” computing device. To accomplish this, the SDI cables must exit the module through EMI filt[...]

Overview Page 77 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The following mainten ance program is used to maintain individual SDI synchronous ports. • LD 48 Link Diagnostic – For checkin g Automatic Call Distrib ution (ACD) and Meridian Link po rts. Instruction s for running the various maint enance programs are fou nd in Software Input/O[...]

Page 78 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 79 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 88 Circuit card installation Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Card slots — Large System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Circuit card installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 80 of 906 Circuit card installati on 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Circuit card installation Ta b l e 1 2 Large System card slots (P ar t 1 of 4) Component Large System A0786611 Call Processor P entium II ® card 81C C ore/Net: “CP” A0810486 Call Processor P entium II 81C Core/Net: “CP” NT1P61 Fiber Super loop Network card Cor[...]

Circuit card installation Page 81 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5K02 Analog Line card IPE: any slot b ut “Contr” NT5K07 Universal T runk card IPE: any slot b ut “Contr” NT5K17 Direct Dia l Inward T r unk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K18 Central Office T r unk card IPE: any slot b ut “Contr” NT5K 19 E&M [...]

Page 82 of 906 Circuit card installati on 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT6D71 U Interf ace Line card IPE: any slot b ut “Contr” NT6D72 Basic Rate Signal Concentrator card IPE: any slot b ut “Contr” NT6D73 Multi-pur pose ISDN Signaling Processor card Core/Net: 0–7 NT6D80 MSDL Core/Net: 0–7 NT7D16 Data Access card IPE: any slot [...]

Circuit card installation Page 83 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTCK43AA Prima r y Rate Interf ace card Core/Net: 0-7 Net: 5-11, 13-14 NTRB33 FIber Junctor Interf ace card For 81C: Core/Net: 8 and 9, Net module: 2 and 3 NTRE39 Optical Cable Management card F or 81C : Net module: the slot to the right side of 14, the slot to the l[...]

Page 84 of 906 Circuit card installati on 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Precautions To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, revi ew the fol lowing guidelines before h andling system eq uipment. To avoid damage to circuit cards from static discharge, wear a properly connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on syst em equipment.[...]

Circuit card installation Page 85 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Keep cards installed in the system as much as possible to avoid dirty contacts and unnecessary wear. • Store cards in a cool, dry, dust-free area. During repair and maintenance procedures do th e following: • Turn off the circuit breaker or switch for a mod u[...]

Page 86 of 906 Circuit card installati on 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Hardware disable cards, whenever th ere is an enable/disable switch, before they are removed or inserted. • Return defective or heavily contaminated cards to a repair center. Do not try to repair or clean them. Installing a circuit card This procedure provides de[...]

Circuit card installation Page 87 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 7 Insert the card into the card aligni ng guides in the card ca ge. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel re sistance. The tip of the locki ng device must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 16). 8 Lock the card into position by si multaneo us[...]

Page 88 of 906 Circuit card installati on 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 9 If there is an enable/disable switch, set it to Enb. Note: Do not enable the switch on an NT8D04 Supe rloop Network card or QPC414 Network card until network loop cabl es are installed. 10 If you are ad ding a voice, con ference, or tone and digit loop, press the man[...]

Page 89 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 100 Acceptance tests Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 90 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Conference cards Procedure 2 T esting conf erence cards Use this procedure to test a confer ence ca rd or to test the confer ence functio n of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Request the status of a lo op on the conference card: LD 38 STAT[...]

Acceptance tests Page 91 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 4 Test the conference loop for c hannel, group, and switching faults: CNFC loop If the conference loop pa sses the tests, the output is OK . If the system response is other than OK , see the Software Inpu t/Output : Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the message s. 5 Pr[...]

Page 92 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Again, see “L D 38” in the Software Input/Outp ut: Maintenance (553-3001-5 11) for detailed information on using this command. 7 End the session in LD 38: **** End of Procedure Digitone receiver cards Procedure 3 T esting digitone receiver cards Use this procedure to test a [...]

Acceptance tests Page 93 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Line cards Procedure 4 T esting line car ds Use this procedure to test a line card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on a specific loop and shelf: LD 30 SHLF l s loop and shelf n umbers If the system r[...]

Page 94 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Multifrequency sender cards Procedure 5 T esting m ultifrequency sender cards Use this procedure to test a multif requency sender (MFS) card or the MFS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Test and enable an MFS loo p: LD 46 MFS loo[...]

Acceptance tests Page 95 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Multifrequency signaling cards Procedure 6 T esting m ultifrequency signaling car ds Use this procedure to test a multifrequency signali ng card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Test and enable th e specified unit: LD 54 ATST l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbe[...]

Page 96 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 3 End the session in LD 30: **** End of Procedure Trunk cards Use the following procedur es to test a trunk card. Procedure 8 T esting a trunk car d using a maintenance telephone 1 Access the system from a mai ntenance teleph one. See “Communicating with the Meridian 1” in t[...]

Acceptance tests Page 97 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When you see the DN? prompt, enter the director y number (DN) you want the system to dial. If the system response is other than OK , see the Software Inpu t/Output : Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 4 End the session in LD 36: **** 5 Test an automa tical[...]

Page 98 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLL loop 4 Test the TDS loop: TDS loo p If the system response is other than OK , see the Software I nput/Outp ut: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 5 End the session in LD 34: **** 6 Using a maintenance [...]

Acceptance tests Page 99 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation RNG#loop## 764#loop## Provides r ing tone from TDS loop specified. **** Exits TDS test progr am. T able 13 TDS tone tests[...]

Page 100 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 101 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 156 Option settings Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Circuit card grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Gene[...]

Page 102 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 QPC471 Clock Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Tr unk card . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 QPC550 Direct Inward Di[...]

Option settings Page 103 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Throughout th is document, if neither O N nor OFF is g iven (there is a b lank space) for a position on a switch, that pos ition may be set to either ON or OFF because it has no function for the option described. Figure 17 Circuit card gr id S4 (switch 4 at coordinate B11) S8[...]

Page 104 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card Table 14 list s option set tings for the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station analo g card. Ta b l e 1 4 OPS analog line car d configuration (P ar t 1 of 3) Applicatio n On-premise station (ON S) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Ser vice (CLS) (Note 1) O[...]

Option settings Page 105 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15 TIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms T able 14 OPS analog line car d configuration (P ar t 2 of 3) Applicatio n On-premise [...]

Page 106 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 BIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 3CO M2 Gain treatment (Note 5) No Ye s Ta b l e 1 4 OPS analog line car d configuration (P ar t 3 of 3) Applicatio n On-premise station (ON S) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Ser vice (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OPX Note 1: [...]

Option settings Page 107 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D12AA Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card Switch setting tables for this card are li sted in subsec tion s according to their function. Bold font desig nates factory (defau lt) settings. General purpose switches Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1 (see Tabl[...]

Page 108 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 A set of three switches provides select ion of dB va lues. Use SW5, SW6, and SW7 for Trunk 0; use SW11, SW12, and SW13 for Trun k 1 (see Table 17). A set of four DIP switches provides se lection among three values for receiver impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 fo r Trunk[...]

Option settings Page 109 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Ring ground switches A set of four DIP switches selects wh ich Ring lines are connected to ground (see Table 19). T able 19 Ring gr ound switc h settings Switch Description S2 s witch setting 1 T r unk 0 T ransmi t off - Ring line is not grounded on- Ring line is grounded 2 T[...]

Page 110 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DCH mode and address select switches One switch sel ects an on-board NTBK51AA D -Channel daughterbo ard and an external MSDL/DCHI card. Fo ur other swit ches provide the daughterboard address (see Table 20). T able 20 DCH mode and address select switc h settings Switch Descript[...]

Option settings Page 111 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Illustrations of switch locatio ns and settings Figure 18 on page 112 displays functional areas for switches on the NT5D12AA DDP card. 9 on off off on 10 off on off on 11 on on off on 12 off off on on 13 on off on on 14 off on on on 15 on on on on Note 1: The maximum n umber [...]

Page 112 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 18 Switch functions and areas J5 J6 Port 0 Port 1 S3 S2 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 General Purpose Switches Receiver Impedence Line Build Out Switches Transmission Mode DCH Mode and Address Select DDP Faceplate 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 553-7[...]

Option settings Page 113 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 19 displays default settin gs for switches on the NT5D12AA DDP card. Figure 19 Switch default settings J5 J6 S2 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S10 S11 S12 S1 3 S14 S15 S3 o n o n o n o n 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 553-7309[...]

Page 114 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC Tables 22 th rough 27 list option settings for the N T6D42 Ringing G enerator. Ta b l e 2 2 NT6D42 recommended options f or Nort h American and British T elecom Applicatio n Ringing frequency Ringing vo l t a g e Jumper lo cations Ringing ou tput Nor[...]

Option settings Page 115 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 25 NT6D42 SW1 Ringing freque ncy (Hz) Po s i t i o n S W 1 20 1 25 2 50 3 T able 26 NT6D42CB SW2 SW2 Ringing vo l t a g e Message waiting vo l t a g e 1234 86 V ac –120 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –120 V dc on off off off 80 V ac[...]

Page 116 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 7 NT6D42CC SW2 SW2 Ringing vo l t a g e Message waiting vo l t a g e 1234 86 V ac –100 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –100 V dc on off off off 80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on 75 V ac –100 V dc off on off off 75 V ac –150 V d[...]

Option settings Page 117 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane NT6D68 Core module backplane T able 28 NT5D2101/NT9D110 2 Core/Net w ork module backplane Jum p e r Location (between slots) Core/Netwo rk 1 Core/N etwork 0 JB1 14/15 Jumper plug not installed Plug installe d Note: Berg jumper i[...]

Page 118 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT6D80 Multi-purp ose Se rial Data Link card Ta b l e 3 0 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Seri al Data Link card Po r t 0 — S W 4 Por t 0 — S W 8 RS-232-D DTE or DC E* RS-422-A DTE (ter minal) RS-422-A DCE (modem) all off all off all on all off all on all off Po r t 1 — S W 3 Por t [...]

Option settings Page 119 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Tables 31 through 35 list option settings for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. T able 31 NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings Modes Locatio n Jum pe r s t r a p Central Office (CO) J1, J2 off 2-wa y tie trunk (loo p dial repeat) J1, J2 off 2-wa [...]

Page 120 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 3 2 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—factory standard T r unk types Lo op length Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X J3.X J4 .X CO/FX/W A TS Zero–1524 m (5 000 ft) Off Off 1–2 1–2 2-wa y tie (LDR) 2-wa y tie (OAID) DID Zero–600 ohms RAN: continuous ope[...]

Option settings Page 121 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 33 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—extended range T r unk types Lo op length Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X J3.X J4 .X CO/FX/W A TS > 1524 m (5 000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 2-wa y tie (LDR ) 2-wa y tie (OAID) DID > 600 ohms On On 1– 2 2–3 RAN: p[...]

Page 122 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 2-wa y tie (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 DID (loop < 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 DID (loop Š 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms N/A 3COM2 RAN: continuous operation mode 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A P aging 600 ohms 6 00 ohms N/A N[...]

Option settings Page 123 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 35 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable lo op resi stance an d loss Cable length Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) 22 A WG 24 A WG 26 A WG 22 A WG 24 A WG 26 A WG 915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 25 1 0.9 1.2 1.5 1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2[...]

Page 124 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Ta b l e 3 6 NT8D15 E&M T runk car d Ju mp e r (Note 1) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trun k 4-wire trunk Ty p e I Pa ging Ty p e I T ype II DX tip & ring pair M—r cv M—xmt E—r cv M—xmt J1.X off off off off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.[...]

Option settings Page 125 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D17 Conference/TDS card Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to change the conference attenuation PAD le vels. These PAD levels are used if prompt CPAD = 1 in LD97. The J1 connec tor on the faceplate is reserved for future u se. You can enab[...]

Page 126 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC Frequency Amplitude Settings P1 P2 P3 20 Hz 86 V ac open open 2–5 8–11 25 Hz 70 V ac open 1–4 7–10 open 25 Hz 80 V ac open 3–6 9–12 open 25 Hz 86 V ac open 2–5 8–11 open 50 Hz 70 V ac 1–4 7–10 open open 50 Hz 80 V ac 3–6 9–12 [...]

Option settings Page 127 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D22 System Monitor The master system monitor, located in the colu mn with CP 0, must be numbered 0. Slave system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63. For examples of system mon itor option settings in basic config urations, see “Sample settings for NT 8D22 Sys tem Monitor[...]

Page 128 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configure the system mon itor in Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) columns as slaves. There is no serial connection be tween RPE columns. Ta b l e 3 7 NT8D22 SW1 SW1 function Po s i t i o n 12345678 Not used Meridian 1 columns only on off P osition 1 is OFF (Mer idian 1 columns[...]

Option settings Page 129 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 38 NT8D22 SW2 SW2 indication Po s i t i o n 12345678 Master system monitor Slav e system monitor on off Not used All other operation on off F or master , indi cates total number of slav es Configure 3–8 according to the T able 40 on page 130 . F or ea ch slav e, indi[...]

Page 130 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 4 0 NT8D22 settings f or total n umb er of slaves—SW2 on master How man y slave units Switch p osition How man y sla ve units Switch p osition 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 on on on on on on 32 off on on on on on 1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off 2 on on on on [...]

Option settings Page 131 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 41 NT8D22 slave address—SW2 on slave Slave unit address Po s i t i o n Slave unit add ress Po s i t i o n 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off 2 on on on on off on 34 off on on on off on 3 on on on on off off 35 off on on on off off 4 o[...]

Page 132 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D41BA Qu ad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Baud rate Switches SW 13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See th e configuration for these switches in Table 42. * F or future use. Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and lo gic on t[...]

Option settings Page 133 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation configurations for both sw itches are shown in Table 43. To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and SW 16 must not be configured identically . * T o enable por ts 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON . T o enable por ts 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + F or each X, the se[...]

Page 134 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card The NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card allows the co nfiguration of interface impedance by way of DIP switches. Ta b l e 4 4 QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings Mode P or t 1 — SW 3 Po r t 1 — S W 2 12345612345 6 DTE (terminal) [...]

Option settings Page 135 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 20 NT8D72 DIP switch setting s S1 S2 11 22 or 75 ohm switch setting 120 ohm switch setting (default) NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB NT8D72BA S1 S2 OFF ON OFF ON S1 S2 11 22 or 75 ohm switch setting 120 ohm switch setting (default) S1 S2 OFF ON OFF ON 553-7463[...]

Page 136 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards Options (minimum vinta g e N) Plug location NT5D21 Core/Network mod ule NT8D35 Network module F13 Application Unit 0 E35 switch Unit 1 E5 switch 123456781234 5678 E&M off off off on off off on[...]

Option settings Page 137 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC414 Network card Application Pin connection J3/S2 and J4/S1 T -1 f aci lities (including PRI/DTI),* channel ser vice unit connect pins 1 and 2 (pin 1 is n e xt to the white dot) Note 1: P ossib le jumper locations for vintage B (for diff erent styles/ser ies): J3—E11 or [...]

Page 138 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards For CS 10 00M SG and Multi Group systems, QPC441 vintage F or later must be used in all modules. Ta b l e 4 5 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT4N41CP PII Core/Net modules J umper Settings: Set J umper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Module[...]

Option settings Page 139 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 46 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules J umper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Module D20 s witch positio n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NT5D21 (Option 61C ) Core/Network 0 off on on off on on on on Core/Network 1 off on on off on on on off [...]

Page 140 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 4 7 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT8D35 module J umper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Modules D20 s witch positio n 1 2 3 4 Option 81, 81C (N ote 1) off on on on Shelf Group 5 6 7 8 0 on on on on 1 on on off on 0 2 on off on on 3 on of[...]

Option settings Page 141 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards Table 48 and Tabl e 49 on page 142 list option settings for loop si gnaling trunk cards. T able 48 QPC559, QPC560 si ngle density Application Single d ensity—Unit 0/1 F30/F8 switch 123456 Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing off off off [...]

Page 142 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 4 9 QPC559, QPC560 do uble density Application Double density— Unit 0/1/2/3 H17/H3/A17/A3 switch 123456 Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing off off off off off off batter y and ground pulsing off off off off on off Other than outgoing ANI on off on off on off Jumper s (Q[...]

Option settings Page 143 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards Table 50 lists switch and jumper settin gs for options available. T able 50 QPC528 T r unk cards switch and jumper settings Switch Settings Switch position: Switch S1 (location A23) 12345678 on off on off on off on off Switch position: Unit 0, Sw[...]

Page 144 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC471 Clock Controller card Table 51 lists option settings for the QPC471 Clock Controller card. Ta b l e 5 1 QPC471 vintage H System SW1 SW2 SW4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 61C on on on on off off off off off on * * 81 off off off off off of f off off off on * * 81C on off off of[...]

Option settings Page 145 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card Note 1: There is no ground start signalling for QPC777 CO trunk cards. Always select loop start signallin g for QPC777 CO trunk cards. Note 2: On QPC777 CO trunk cards, the pads are in for short line lengths and the pads are out fo[...]

Page 146 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card Tables 52 thro ugh 56 give the option set tings for the Q PC550 DID Trunk card. Ta b l e 5 2 QPC550 vintages A and B—real/com plex balance impedance selection Device location Device designation Switch numb er Unit numb er Impedance type Re[...]

Option settings Page 147 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 54 QPC550 vintage A—software/hard ware contr ol for 2dB pad Device location Device designatio n Unit numb er Switch numb er S/W 2 dB pad contr ol H/W (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1 0 1 off off on 2 on off off 1 3 on off off 4 off off on F1 S2 0 1 off off on 2 on off off 1[...]

Page 148 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 5 6 QPC550 vintage B—software control fo r 2dB pad Device location Device designation Unit numb er Switch numb er 2 dB pad con trol H/W (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1.0/1 1 1 on off 2 off off 0 3 off off 4 on off F1 S1.2/3 3 1 on off 2 off off 2 3 off off 4 on off[...]

Option settings Page 149 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk c ard Signal duration on the 18-pair faceplate S1 (F33) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Binar y value (.1 second) 1 2 4 8 16 32 Note: This switch determines the length of time a signal stays on the 18-pa ir data bus. The time is set in binary to the nearest tenth second[...]

Page 150 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card Location Connecti on 12 DTMF tones E9 Center to E3 16 DTMF tones E9 Center to E2 16/12 tone options jumper J umper at P1 16 tone (4 x 4) connect pins 1 and 2 12 ton[...]

Option settings Page 151 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 1, 3, 7 on 136–225 m (451–750 ft) 101–200 m (356–655 ft) Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF SW3-1 on = extended superframe forma t (ESF) off = superframe format (SF) T able 57 QPC720 Primary Rate Inter face card (P ar t 2 of 2) Switch S2 setti ngs T o repeater facility [...]

Page 152 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC775 Clock Controller card Tables 58 and 59 give option settings for the QPC77 5 Clock Controller card. Ta b l e 5 8 QPC775 (before vinta g e E) switc h settings System SW2 SW3 SW4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CS 1000M MG off off off off off off off off on on on on CS 1000M SG on [...]

Option settings Page 153 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Tables 60 through 62 list opti on settings for the QPC841 4-Port SDI card. T able 60 QPC841 por t 1 and 2 address selection Device number SW14 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 off off off off off on on on 2 3 off off off off off o[...]

Page 154 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Device number SW15 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 off off off off off on on on 2 3 off off off off off on on off 4 5 off off off off off on off on 6 7 off off off off off on off off 8 9 off off off off off off on on 10 11 off off off off off off on off 12 13 off off off [...]

Option settings Page 155 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 62 QPC841 DTE or DCE selection Mode Po r t 1 — S W 8 Po r t 1 — S W 9 1234561234 56 DTE (ter minal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber) off on off off off off off on off off off off on on on off on off on off on on on on Po r t 2 ?[...]

Page 156 of 906 Option settin gs 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 157 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 182 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 158 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 used whenever the phone li nes have to leave th e building in which the switch is installed. The NT1R20 OPS analog line card provides: • line supervis ion • hookflash • battery reversal Each unit is independ ently configured by software control [...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 159 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 21 OPS analog line card – faceplate S OPS Anlg LC NT1R20 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6190[...]

Page 160 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description This functional descripti on of the NT 1R20 Off-Prem ise Station (OPS) analog line card is divided into two parts. Firs t, a description of the card’s contro l, signaling, an d power interfaces is given, followed by a descript[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 161 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces Voice and signa ling interfaces The eight line interfaces provide d by the NT1R20 OPS analog line card connect to conventio nal, 2-wire (tip an d ring), anal og line facilities. Incomin g analog voice and signali ng information from[...]

Page 162 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Line interface units The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains eight ind ependently configurable interface units. Relays are pr ovided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line. Signal detection circu its monitor on-hook/o ff-hook signaling. Two code[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 163 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — firmware ve rsion — self-test status — programmed configuration status • receipt and implementatio n of card configuration: — programming of the codecs — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of input/o[...]

Page 164 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 See Software Input/Output : Administration (553 -3001-311) for LD 10 service change instructions. Ta b l e 6 3 OPS analog line car d configuration Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of ser vice ONS OPS Loop resistance[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 165 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Port-to-port loss configurat ion The loss plan for the NT1R20 OPS anal og line card determines po rt-to-port loss for connections between an OPS anal og line card un it (port) and other ports. The transmission properties of each lin e unit are char[...]

Page 166 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Analog line interface Table 64 lists the electrical characteris ti cs of NT1R20 OPS an alog line card line interface units. T able 64 OPS analog line car d – el ectrical charac teristics Characteristic Specification T er minal impedance (TIMP) 600 o[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 167 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements Table 65 shows the maximum power cons umed by the card from each system power supply. Foreign and surge voltage protection The NT1R20 OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltag e (power cross) specifications and FCC [...]

Page 168 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Environmental specifications Table 67 shows the environmental speci fications of the OPS analog line card. Operation The applications, featur es, and signaling arrangem ents for each unit on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card are assi gned through LD 10 [...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 169 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming calls Incoming calls to a telephone co nnected to the NT1R20 O PS analog line card originate from stations that can be local (serve d by the PBX) or remote (served through the public switched telephone net work). The alerting signal to tel[...]

Page 170 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Outgoing calls For outgoing calls from a telephone, a lin e unit is seized when the te lephone goes off-hook, pl acing a low-resi stance loop across the t ip and ring leads towards the NT1R20 OPS analog line card (see Tabl e 69 on page 170 ). When the[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 171 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outpulsing Add ressing signals Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or DTMF tones). The system detects sta r t of dia ling and remov e dial tone. Ringback (or busy) The system decodes addressing, route calls, and supply r ingback tone to nea[...]

Page 172 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connector pin assignments The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telepho ne lines to the IPE backplane through a 160 -pin connector shroud. The backplan e is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then con[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 173 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 23 OPS analog line card – typica l cross connecti on exampl e 553-AAA1117 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT1R20 Off-premise Station Line Card Unit 0 Unit 7 0T 0R 26 1 27 2 System Cross-connect OPS or ONS telephone connections A MDF Unit 1 Unit 2[...]

Page 174 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring the OPS analog line card The line type, term inating imped ance, and balance net work configuration for each unit on the card is selected by soft ware service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card. [...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 175 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Before the appropriate balance networ k can be selected, the loop length between the near-end and the far-end station must be known. To assist in determining loop length, “Port-to-p ort loss” on page 180 describes so me typical resistance and l[...]

Page 176 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 24 OPS analog line card – jumper block locations 553-6191 J4.0 J4 . 1 J6 . 0 J6. 1 J7 . 0 J7 . 1 J 0.0 J0. 1 J2. 0 J2. 1 J 3.0 J3. 1 J1 .0 J1 . 1 J5 . 0 J5. 1[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 177 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation local office, or through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices; however, depending on the facil ities used, the local office serving the OPS station can provide line functi ons such as battery and ringing. Facilities are gener[...]

Page 178 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 25 Traditional OPS application confi guration 553-AAA1118 System Public Network Non-switched thru connections OPS analog line card port CO trunk card port OPS termination Local CO Distant CO 0–3.5 dB 4.5 dB maximum 7.0 dB total maximum OPS li[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 179 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Other applications The operating range and built-in protectio n provisions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional config uration shown in Figure 2 5 on p age 178 . Examples of such[...]

Page 180 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Port-to-port loss Loss is inserted between OPS analog li ne card ports and oth er ports in accordance with the loss plan. This plan dete rmines the port-to-port loss for each call. When a port is configured for CLS OP S, loss is programmed into the OP[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 181 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The overall rang e achievable on an OPS line f acility is limited by the signaling range (2300 ohms loop incl uding telephone resistance). Th e signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; thus, gain treatmen t can be used to extend the voice r[...]

Page 182 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 OPS line termination s with loudness characteristics desig ned for other applications can also impact transm ission perform an ce. For example, wireless portables loudness characteristic s are selected for connections to switching systems for wireless[...]

Page 183 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 192 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 184 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gasket and two ejector/ injector handles. A reset button and two do uble LED packages (four LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well. The front panel features the following : • stacked dual standard DB9 Ser[...]

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 185 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 26 CP PIV card (front) Lan 1 Lan 2 COM 1 COM 2[...]

Page 186 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 27 CP PIV card (side) Functional description The card employs an In tel Pentium Pro cessor as the central processing unit. The internal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The processor is manufactu red in 0.09 um pro cess technology and provide[...]

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 187 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation double pumped address bus (addresses running at 2*1 00 MHz = 200 MHz) is 32 bit wide supporting an address rang e of up to 4 GBytes. The processor voltage specification is complian t with IMVP IV specification. Memory CP PIV mem ory uses DDR SDRAM t echnology. The[...]

Page 188 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 4 DTR 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RT S 8 CTS 9 RI T able 72 COM1 and COM2 pin as signments[...]

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 189 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation USB port The physical interface for the USB port to the front panel is through a standard USB connector. The correspondi ng Pin details are shown in Table 73. 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports The physical interface for the two 10/100/1 000 Mbps Ethernet ports to th[...]

Page 190 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Front panel LED indicators The CP PIV card has a total of five LEDS on the front panel which are 15 KV ESD protected and can be controlled via CPLD. Table 75 explain s the function of each LED. Author’s note : Are there 5 or 4? Ta b l e 7 5 Front panel LED fu nctio[...]

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 191 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only) Post 80 Debug LEDs (Optional) CP PIV has post 80 d ebug LEDs to assist in debuggin g the board and solvin g boot related problem s. Using a GPCS fr om Super I/O X-bus, data lines are latched using latch 74F374. These help iden ti[...]

Page 192 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 193 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 248 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 194 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Nortel Norstar. The lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipment feat ures such as hookflash, transfer, hold, and conference. This [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 195 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 29 Lineside T1 card faceplate YEL ALM RED ALM MAINT S LTI Rlse 0x NT5D11 Card lock latch Card lock latch Warning LEDs This symbol indicates that field-selectable switch settings are located on this card Card status LED 553-6478[...]

Page 196 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 76. The STATUS LED indicates that the lineside T1 card has successfully passed its self test, and is functional. When th e card is installed, this LED remains li t for two to five seconds as the self-t[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 197 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Note: The STATUS LED indicates th e enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the linesid e T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherbo ard and the daughterboard slots must be enable d. The STAT US LED will t[...]

Page 198 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on p age 225 for information on T1 link main tenance. If the card detects that tests are being run or that alarms have been disabled through the MMI, this LED will light and will remain lit until [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 199 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The lineside T1 card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective all-digital connection betw een T1 compatible termin al equipment (such as voice mail systems, voi ce response units, and tradi ng turrets) and the system. The terminal equi[...]

Page 200 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card interfaces The lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card LAN link. T1 interface circuit The lineside T1 card contains one T1 li ne interface cir[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 201 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Microcontroller s The lineside T1 card contains a microcont roller that controls the in ternal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the foll owing: • reporting to the CPU via t[...]

Page 202 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Man-Machin e Interfa ce The lineside T1 card provides an opti onal Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used fo r T1 link performance m onitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 203 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The lineside T1 card requires +15 V, – 15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply A C or NT6D40 IPE Po wer Supply DC can supply power to a maximu m of eight lineside T1 cards. See Table 78. Foreign and su[...]

Page 204 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Environmental specifications Table 79 list s the environmental speci fications of the lineside T1 card. Installation and configuration Installation and confi guration of the lineside T1 card consists of si x basic steps: 1 Configure the dip switch [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 205 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Dip switch settings Begin the installation and config uration of the lineside T1 card by selecting the proper dip switch settings for the environm ent. The lineside T1 card contains two dip switches, each containi ng eight switch positions. They[...]

Page 206 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 LD 97 for type: XPE. However, this is not mandatory, and, since the dip switch is limited to 16, this w ill not alway s be possible. Figure 31 Lineside T1 card – T1 pro tocol dip switch lo cations 553-6479 S1 S2 dip s witches[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 207 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T1 framing The lineside T1 card is capable of in terfacing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for thi s dip switch position based on what type of frami ng the CPE or CSU equipm ent supports. T1 coding [...]

Page 208 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 cabled directly into the MMI terminal or modem; select the slave setting if this card is cabled to another lineside T1 card in a daisy chain. Tables 80 through 83 describes the proper dip switch settings for each type of T1 link. After the card has[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 209 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 05 Off On Off On 06 Off On On Off 07 Off On On On 08 On Off Off Off 09 On Off Off On 10 On Off On Off 11 On Off On On 12 On On Off Off 13 On On Off On 14 On On On Off 15 On On On On T able 82 Lineside T1 card – T1 Switc h 2 (S 2) dip s witch s[...]

Page 210 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Installation This section describes how to inst all and test the lineside T1 card. When installed, the line side T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 IPE m odule. When installi ng the lineside T1 card into NT8D37 IPE [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 211 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Certain vintage levels have dedicated 25-pair I/O connect ors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split bet[...]

Page 212 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Vintage levels c abling 16 ports For modules with vintage levels that cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the lineside T1 card can be installed in to the following card slot pairs: The lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 213 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabling the lineside T1 card After configuring the dip sw itches and installing the lineside T1 card into the selected card slots, the li neside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE or CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MM I [...]

Page 214 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 32 Lineside T1 card – connection us ing the NT5D13AA lineside T1 cable 553-AAA1119 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 Module I/O panel 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 16 41 17 42 24 49 System A (bl-w) (w-bl) (o-w) (w-o) (g-w) (w-g) (br-[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 215 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Pr ocedure 11 Connecting to the MDF To make the connectio ns at t he MDF, follow this procedure: 1 Punch down the first eigh t pairs of a standard telco 25-pair female-connectorized cross-connect ta il starting with the first tip and ring pair o[...]

Page 216 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 13A 2 T1 Tip , T ransmit Data 13B 27 T1 Ring, T ransmit Data 14A 3 Alar m out, Nor mally open 14B 28 Alar m out, Common 15A 4 Alar m out, Nor mally closed 15B 29 No Connection 16A 5 No Connection 16B 30 A wa y from MMI ter minal, Receive Data 17A 6[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 217 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 86 show s the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA lineside T1 I/O cable. T able 86 Lineside T1 card – NT5D13AA connector pinouts (P art 1 of 2) I/O panel connector pin Lead designations NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O connector pin Lineside[...]

Page 218 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 T1 connect ions T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted ov er P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 as sh own in Table 8 6 on page 217 . Plug the DB15 male connect or labeled “P2” into the T1 link. T1 tran smit and receive pairs must be tur[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 219 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation One of the ways it can report inform ation is through this extern al alarm connection. If conn ected, the lineside T1 card’s microproces sor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has classified as[...]

Page 220 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Pr ocedure 12 Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI t erminal Follow this procedure for con necting two or more lineside T1 ca rds to the MMI terminal: 1 Cable the DB9 male conn ector labeled “P5” (towar ds MMI terminal) to one of[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 221 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 33 Lineside T1 card – connecting two or more ca rds to the MMI 553-6481 No connection LTI card no. 1 LTI card no. 2 LTI card no. 3 Last LTI card in daisy chain MMI terminal IPE module backplane I/O panel on rear of IPE module NT5D13 Mai[...]

Page 222 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the line side T1 card, the interface characteristics must be configured to the following: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, d epending on the setting of switch position 1 of Swi[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 223 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation cross-referenced to the correspondin g card unit number. This mapping is shown in Tab le 87. T able 87 DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping (P ar t 1 of 2) Item TN T1 Channel Number Motherbo ard 0 1 Motherbo ard 1 2 Motherbo ard 2 3 Motherbo ard 3 4 Mo[...]

Page 224 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Disconnect su pervision The lineside T1 card supports far-end d isconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equi pment upon the system's detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervi s[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 225 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) suppl ies a maintenance interface to a terminal that p rovides T1 link diagno stics and historical informatio n. See “Installation and configuration” o[...]

Page 226 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Two levels of alarm severity exist fo r bit errors and frame slip errors. For these conditions, two different thres hol d and duration configurations are established. When the first level of severity is r eached (alarm level 1), the MMI will do the[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 227 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • bursty seconds • unavail able seconds • framer slip seconds • loss of frame seconds It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24 hours. Descripti ons of each of these performance [...]

Page 228 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 A space is inserted between the login co mmand (L), the shelf address, and the card slot address. The MMI then prompts for a pa sswor d. The pass word is “ LTILINK ”, and it must be typed al l in capital lett ers. After logging in, the promp t [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 229 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation If ?<CR> is typed, the MMI will list th e above commands along with an explanation of their usage A screen similar to the following will appear. The help screen can also appear by typin g H<CR> , or HELP<CR> . Each of these com[...]

Page 230 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 C E Clear Error Clears the err or counter f or the T1. D A [P] Display Alarms [P ause] Displays the alar m log – a list of the mo st recent 100 alar ms alo ng with time and date stamps. D C Display Configuration Displays the configur ation settin[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 231 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Q Quit Logs the ter minal user out. If multiple lineside T1 cards share a single ter minal, logout after using the MMI. Because of th e shared daisy-chained link, if a lineside T1 card is logged in, it occupies th e b us and no other lineside T1[...]

Page 232 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring parameters The MMI has been designed with d efault settings so that no confi guration is necessary. However, it can be configured to suit a specific environment. Set Time Before configurin g the MMI, login to th e system and enter the c[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 233 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When the Set Alarm command is used, a prompt appears to configure the threshold level and duration period for alarm levels 1 and 2. The threshold value indicates the number of bit errors detected per second that is necessary to a ctivate the ala[...]

Page 234 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Clearing ” option has been set. Ot herwise, the alarm will con tinue until the command set Clear Alarm (C A) has been entered. When an alarm is cleared, the followin g activity caused by the alarm will be cleared: • the external alarm hardware [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 235 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI will scroll thr ough the previously described series of alar m optio ns. These options are displayed along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the current value. T[...]

Page 236 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The “Disable Self-Clear ing” option cause s the system to continue the alarm condition until th e Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. Line processing and the yellow alarm indicatio n to the CPE is terminated as soon as the alarm condition[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 237 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be found in “Configuring parameters” on page 232 . Bit errors may activate either a level 1 or lev el 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, will al[...]

Page 238 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the lineside T1 card can enter line processing mode. Clear Alarm The Clear Alarm (C A) command set wi ll clear all activity initiat ed by an alarm: the external alarm hardware will be deactivated (the contact nor[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 239 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation of the lineside T1 card. Entering the Display Status (D S) command set will cause a screen similar to the follo wing to appear: Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the T1 lin k according to several performance [...]

Page 240 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Loss of frame seconds – loss of frame or loss of signal for three consecutive seconds. • Framer slip seconds – one ore more frame slips in a second. The MMI also maintains an overall error coun ter that is a sum of all the errors counted [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 241 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Display History Enter the Display H istory (D H) command set to display performance counters for each hour for the past 24 hours. A screen similar to the following will appear: Use the pause command to display a fu ll screen at a time by enterin[...]

Page 242 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Tests can be performed once (for 1 th rough 98 minutes), or continuo usly (selected by entering 99 minutes) until a “Stop Test” command is entered. Tests contin ue for the duration speci f ied even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 243 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Test 2, external loopback, assumes an ext ernal loopback is appli ed to the T1 link. Test data is generated and received by the lineside T1 card on all timeslots. If test 1 p asses but test 2 fails, it indi cates that the T1 link is defective be[...]

Page 244 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 in tandem. Figure 36 demonstrates how the signalin g is looped back toward the CPE equipment. Applications The lineside T1 interface is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between T1-com patible IP E and a system or off-premise[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 245 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation For example, the lineside T1 card can be used to connect the system to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipmen t is Nortel Open IVR system. In this way, the system can send a call to the VRU. Because the lineside T1 card support[...]

Page 246 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 38 Lineside T1 inte rface in off-premi se application 553-AAA1124 T1 T1 Channel bank LTI System Public network[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Linesi de T1 Interface cards Page 247 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Similarly, the lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 39. In this case, channel banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface. Note: The line[...]

Page 248 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lin eside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 249 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 312 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 250 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 in the Analog (500/2500-type ) Telephone A dministration program LD 10. The LEI also comes equippe d with a Man-Machine Interface (MMI) maintenance program , which provides diagnostic information regarding the status of the E1 link. • NT5D33AC/NT[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 251 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation motherboard (31.75 by 25.40 cm (12 .5 by 10 in) and a daughterboard (5.0 8 by 15.24 cm (2 by 6 in). Card connections The LEI uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ri ng cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair Amphenol co nnecto r on the IPE I[...]

Page 252 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 40 NT5D33AB LEI card – faceplate[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 253 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 41 NT5D34AB LEI card – faceplate[...]

Page 254 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The LEDs give status indicat ions on the operations as described in Table 92. The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully pas sed its self test, and therefore, if it is f unctional . When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 255 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation condition. Depending on how the Man Machine Interface (MMI) is configured, this LED will remain lit until one the following actions occur: • If the “Self-Clearing” function is en abled in the MMI, the LED will clear the alarm when the alar[...]

Page 256 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 42 LEI card – block diagram[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 257 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Overvi ew The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital connection between E1 compati ble terminal equi pment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, trading turr ets, etc.) and the system. In this appli[...]

Page 258 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 E1 interface cir cuit The LEI contains one E1 line-interface circuit which provide s 30 individually configurable voice interfaces to one E1 link in 30 differ ent time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X transmi t signaling bitstr[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 259 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — card identification (card type , vintage, serial number) — firmware ve rsion — self-test results — programmed unit parameter status • receipt and implementatio n of card configuration — control of the E1 line interface — enabling[...]

Page 260 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 provides alarm notification, E1 link perfo rmance reporting, and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem. Mult iple cards (up to 64) can be served th rough one MMI terminal or[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 261 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 2 Redirecting Line ID Presentation (RLIP) When an incoming call over th e TDM/IP network or a CS 1000 originated call which has undergone redi rections is directed towards the CAS+ compliant system, Redir ecting Li ne ID can be provided over the[...]

Page 262 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements Table 94 shows the v oltage and maximu m current that the LEI requires from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight LEIs. Foreign and surge voltage protections [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 263 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Installation and Configuration Installation and confi guration of the LEI consists of six basic steps: 1 Configure the dip switch es on th e LEI for the call environment. 2 Install the LEI into the selected card slots. 3 Cable from the I/O panel[...]

Page 264 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 of the motherboard circuit card as shown in Figu re 44 on page 266 . The settings for these switches are shown in Table 96 on page 267 through Table 99 on page 270 . When the LEI card is oriented as shown in Figure 44 on page 266 , the dip switches[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 265 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation E1 Coding The LEI is capable of interfac ing with LTU equipm ent usi ng either AMI or HDB3 coding. Make the selection for this dip switch posit ion based on the type of coding the LTU equipmen t supports.[...]

Page 266 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 44 LEI card – E1 protocol dip switch locations U7 8 U7 7 C4 6 U6 4 U6 6 U7 9 U6 3 U6 5 U6 2 RP1 6 C4 1 C3 6 U6 1 C3 5 U6 0 U4 8 U4 9 U4 7 U2 5 U2 6 U2 9 R2 5 R2 6 C2 5 C3 4 R2 0 R1 9 C3 7 C7 1 RP 8 RP 7 C4 2 C6 9 C6 7 C6 8 U3 1 U3 0 U2 8 U[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 267 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Line supervision on E1 f ailure This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports will appear to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Merid ian 1 in case of E1 fail ure. Ports can appear as either in the “on-hoo k” or “off-hook” states on E1[...]

Page 268 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 When dip swit ch #1, positi ons 2 and 8 are set to “Table,” AB Bits are configured by the user through the Set Mode MMI com mand (see “Set Mode” on page 295 ). Otherwise, the signaling scheme selected by dip sw itch 1, positions 2 and 8 wil[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 269 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 98 LEI card – XPEC address dip switc h settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) XPEC Address S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 3 S1 Switc h Po s i t i o n 4 S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 5 S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 6 00 OFF OFF OFF OFF 01 ON OFF OF F OFF 0[...]

Page 270 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 When setting E1 Swit ch 2 dip switch se ttings, there are di fferences between vintages. For NT5D33AB or NT5D34AB cards, use Table 99. For NT5D33AC or NT5D34 AC cards, use Table 99 o n page 270 . Ta b l e 9 9 LEI card – E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switc[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 271 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation After the card has b een installed, display the dip switch set tings using the MMI command Display Configuration (D C) . See “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 28 4 for details on this and the rest of the available MMI c[...]

Page 272 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 of module or cabinet. In all other modules or cabinets where the con ditions listed below do not exist, the LEI will work in any tw o adjacent card slots: • In the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expan sion Cabinet only card slots 10-15 are available. ?[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 273 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Vintage levels cabling 30 ports: For modules wit h vintage levels that cabled 30 por ts to the I/O panel, the LEI can be installed in any pair of card slots 0-15. Vintage levels c abling 16 ports: For modules wit h vintage levels that cable 16 p[...]

Page 274 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Alternatively, all LEI conn ections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the N T5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card external I/O cable at the I/O panel. This elimin ates these card slot restrictions. Cabling the LEI card After t[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 275 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation This cable consists of a 25-pair amph enol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 connectors: 1 a DB15 female connector (P2) with an adapter that breaks out Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive ) connectors, which[...]

Page 276 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 103 shows the pin assignments from the I/O panel rel ating to the pin assignments of the lineside E1 I/O cable. 17A 6 A wa y from MMI ter minal, transmit data 17B 31 T ow ard MMI ter minal, transmit data 18A 7 T ow ard MMI ter minal, re ceiv [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 277 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation E1 Connections For twisted-pair installations, E1 si gnaling for all 30 channels is transm itted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11, as shown in Table 103 on page 276 . Plug the DB 15 male connector labeled “P2” i nto the E1 lin k. E1 tr[...]

Page 278 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 CPE at the far-end w ill likewise have transm it and receive wired straig ht from the RJ48 demarc at the far- end of the carri er facility. For 75 ohm coaxial instal lations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitt ed over P2 co nnector pins [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 279 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 128 LEIs can be linked, located in up to 16 separ ate IPE shel ves, to one MMI terminal using the daisy chain approach. If only one LEI is will be installed, cable from the DB9 male connecto r labeled “P5” (toward MMI terminal ) to one of th[...]

Page 280 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 45 LEI card – conn ecting two or more cards to the MMI Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface characteristics must be set to: • speed – 1200 or 2400 bps • character width – 7[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 281 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • stop bits – o ne • software handshak e (XON/XOFF ) – off Software Configuration Although much of th e arch itecture and many features of the LEI card are different from the analog line card, th e LEI has been designed to emulate an ana[...]

Page 282 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Motherbo ard 7 8 Motherbo ard 8 9 Motherboard 9 10 Motherboard 10 11 Motherbo ard 11 12 Motherbo ard 12 13 Motherbo ard 13 14 Motherbo ard 14 15 Motherbo ard 15 17 Daughterb oard 0 18 Daughterb oard 1 19 Daughterb oard 2 20 Daughterb oard 3 21 Daug[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 283 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Disconnect su pervision The LEI supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the term inal equipment upon th e system’s detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. Th e Supervised Analog Lin[...]

Page 284 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) pr ovides E1-link diagnostics and historical information fo r the LEI system. See “Installation and Configuration ” on page 263 for instru ctions on how t[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 285 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Two levels of alarm severity exist fo r bit errors. Diff erent threshold and duration settings must be established for each level. When the first level of severity is r eached (alarm level 1), the MMI causes the following : • the external alar[...]

Page 286 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • framer-slip seconds • loss-of-frame seconds The MMI retains E1 performance statis tics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24. For descripti ons of these performance error counters and instructions on how to create a repo[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 287 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation LEI::ss cc> (for multi-card installations, where ss represents the sh elf address and cc represents the card slot addres s.) Basic commands MMI commands can now be executed. The seven basic commands are: •H e l p •A l a r m • Clear •D[...]

Page 288 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Each of these commands can be execute d by entering the fir st letter of the command or by entering the entire comman d. Commands with more than one word are entered by entering the first le tter of the first word, a space, and the first letter of [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 289 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation D S(P) Display Status . Displa ys carr ier status, including alar m state and, if active , al ar m le v el. (Momentar ily stop the scrolling display b y typing P . Continue scrolling by typing any other k e y .) H or ? Help . Displa ys the He lp[...]

Page 290 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring parameters The MMI has been designed with d efault settings so that no confi guration is necessary. However, it can be configured based on the call environm ent. Set Time Before beginning to con figure the MMI, login to the s ystem and [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 291 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal — the LEI card enters line-conditioning mo de — a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/LTU Line processing sends the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 either all “on[...]

Page 292 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The duration value i s set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3,600 seco nds (1 hour). This duration value indicat es how long the alarm condition must last before an alarm will be decl ared. Low bit-error rates (1 0 7 through 10 9 ) are restricte[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 293 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation An alarm condition is not autom atically cleared until the sy stem no long er detects the respective bit error thresho ld during the corresponding duration period. For example, if AL1 threshold of 6 (represen ting 10-6) is specified, and a durat[...]

Page 294 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: If the duration peri od set is too long, the LEI card is slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer experiencing errors. The CLEAR ALARM (C A) command has to be entered manually to restore serv ice prom ptly. T[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 295 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When the far-end terminates a call, Re lease 1 of LEI’s AB vi ntage sends a disconnect message to the terminal equipment and waits for the terminal equipment to go idle before going id le itself. A NO response to the S S command configures Rel[...]

Page 296 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 However, responding to thi s prompt with 2 selects “Table” and allows the user to set the A/B Bit Mode to what ev er configuration the user chooses. If “Table” is selected, the individual ta ble values will is prompted for. See Figure 50 on[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 297 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Idle SEND – T his is the value that the LEI se nds (acting as the CO or PSTN) when the circuit is in the id le state. This value is required. Idle RECEIVE – T his is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when it is in the idle s[...]

Page 298 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 unable to accept new calls. Set th is value to N if this stat e is not needed. If this value is not set to N, then dip switch #2 position 6 will de termine whether off-hook or on-hook is sent to the M1/SL100 when this state is entered. See Table 99[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 299 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming call Ringer ON SEND – This is the value that th e LEI sends to indicate that a call is inco ming to the CPE and that ringing voltage should be applied at the CPE. This value is requir ed. Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the [...]

Page 300 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Outgoing call DIAL BREAK RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE during the break part of the digit. This value is required. Outgoing call ANSWERED SEND – This is the value that the LEI will send to indicate that th[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 301 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 52 Display Configurat ion (D C) screen Alarm operation and reporting The MMI monitors the E1 link acco rding to parameters established throug h the Set Alarm command for the following conditions: • Excessive bit error rate • Frame sl [...]

Page 302 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-fram e condition, or blue alarm condition occurs. If a repeating device loses signal, it i mmediately beg ins sendi ng an un framed signal of all ones to th e far-end to in dicate an alarm condition. This c[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 303 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 53 Display Alarm (D A) screen The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D A P . If there is more than one screen in the log, the MMI scrolls the log until the screen is full, then stops. Wh en ready to [...]

Page 304 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 54 Display Status (D S) scr een Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the E1 lin k according to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss-of-frame and frame-slip seconds. It re[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 305 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Loss-of-frame seconds are seco nds in which loss-of-frame or loss-of-signal condition s have exis ted for three cons ecutive seconds. • Frame slip seconds a re seconds in which one or more frame sli ps occur. The MMI also maintains an over[...]

Page 306 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D P P . If more than o ne screen is to be d isplayed, the MMI scrolls until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 307 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T esting The T est Carrier (T) com mand allows tests to be run on the LEI, the E1 link, or the CPE device. The three tests are designed to provide the capability to isolate faulty conditions in any of these three sources. See Table 108 on page 3[...]

Page 308 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 108 shows which test to r un for the associated equipment. Test 1, local loopback, loops the E1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector. Test data is gene rated and received on all timeslots. If this test fails, i t indicates [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 309 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 60 MMI External loopback test Test 3, network loopback, loops the LEI's received E1 data back tow ard the CPE. No test data is generated or receiv ed b y the LEI. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is[...]

Page 310 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-e ffective connection between E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system or off-premise extensions over long distances. Some examples of applica tions where an LEI c[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Li neside E1 Interface cards Page 311 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation send a call to the VRU, and, because the LEI supports anal og (500/2500-type) telephone functional ity, the VRU is able to send the call back to the system for furthe r handling. The LEI can also be used to provide off-premise extensio ns to rem[...]

Page 312 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lin eside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 64 LEI connection to Norstar syste m E1 Norstar E1 LEI Public network E1[...]

Page 313 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 318 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 314 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided p rinted circuit board . The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector. The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red LED [...]

NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Page 315 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Bell 202 standard. The transmission is impl emented by the appropri ate PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz. Upon completion of transmitt ing the CND data, the CLASS Modem card sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission of the C[...]

Page 316 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 04 05 06 07 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 T able 10 9 Time slot mapp ing (P ar t 2 of 2) XCMC mapp ing [...]

NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Page 317 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Electrical specifications This section lists the el ectrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card. Data transmission specifications Table 110 provides specificatio ns for th e 32 transmit-on ly modem resources. The CLASS m odem card has no direct connectio[...]

Page 318 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuration The NT5D60/80 CLASS Mo dem card has no user-co nfigurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address fr om its position in the backplane and reports that inform ation back to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M , and Meridian 1 CPU through the Card LAN [...]

Page 319 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 366 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Contents The following are the t opics in this section: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 320 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware desi gn uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer. The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 s pecification. The NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external di gital line either directly or through an office repeater, Net[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 321 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 112 indicates how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP2 status. NT5D97 faceplate Figure 65 on page 322 illu strates the faceplate layout for the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable /disable switch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 [...]

Page 322 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 65 NT5D97 faceplate D-Channel LED ENET LED Trunk Disable LED Trunk Out of Service LED Near End Alarm LED Far End Alarm LED Loop Back LED Recovered Clock0#1 Recovered Clock0#2 Recovered Clock1#1 Recovered Clock1#2 External DCHI/MSDL Trunk0 / Trunk1 553-7380[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 323 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 11 3 External connector s and LEDs Function F aceplate Design ator Ty p e Description Switch ENB/DIS Plastic , ESD prot ected Card Enable/disab le switch Connectors Unit 0 Clock 0 R J11 Connector Connects reference cloc k 0 to Clock Controller card 0 Un[...]

Page 324 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The following sections provide a brie f description of each element on the faceplate. Enable/Disable Sw itch This switch is used to disab le the card prior to insertio n or removal from the network shelf. W hile this sw itch is in d isable position, the card will[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 325 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation LBK LEDs Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performed on trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loo pback indication is active when th e digital trunk is in rem ote loopback mod e. Normal call p rocessing is inhibited dur ing the remote loo[...]

Page 326 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Port definitions Since the NT5D97 card is dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can be defined in the following combin ations: Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended addressing mode. T able 11 4 NT5D97AA/AB loops configur ation Loop 0 no[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 327 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation System capacity and performance Physical ca pacity Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total num ber of DDP2 cards per syst em is limited by the numb er of netwo[...]

Page 328 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements Table 116 lists the power requirement s for the NT5D97 DDP2 card. Cable requirements This section lists the types of cable used and the lengt hs required for internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections. Note: No additional cablin g is require[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 329 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — NTCG03AB — NTCG03AC — NTCG03AD • DDP2 to DCH cables — NTCK46AA — NTCK46AB — NTCK46AC — NTCK46AD • DDP2 to MSDL cables — NTCK80AA — NTCK80AB — NTCK80AC — NTCK80AD A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows. E1 carrier cabl es N[...]

Page 330 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 117 which follows lists the pin attri butes for the NTCK45AA cable. Figure 6 6 NTCK45AA Ta b l e 1 1 7 NTCK4 5AA cab le pins (P art 1 of 2) Cab le Name Description Color DDP2 pins I/O P anel pins 0 T- P R I 0 T X T runk 0 T ransmit Tip Blac k P1-1 P2-6 0 R-[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 331 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D7217 (A061 7192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120 Ω cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connect ing the 9 pi n I/O filter conn ector to the 9 pin NCTE connector. Table 118 which follows lists the pin attribut es for the NT8D7217 cable. 1 [...]

Page 332 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTCK78AA (A0618294) The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is an 120 Ω cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin ma le) to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15 pin males). The NTCK78AA is used for syst ems not equipped with an I/O [...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 333 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 119 lists t he pin attri butes for the NTCK78AA cable. NTCK79AA (A0618296) The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75 Ω coaxial cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pi n male) to the Line Terminating Unit (LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC ma[...]

Page 334 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 120 lists the pin attri butes for the NTCK79AA cable. Figure 6 9 NTCK79AA Ta b l e 1 2 0 NTCK7 9AA cab le pins (P art 1 of 2) Cable Name Description Color DDP2 pins NCTE pins 0 T- P R I 0 T X T runk 0 T ransmit Tip Red P1-1 P2 inner conductor 0 R-PRI0TX T r[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 335 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Referenc e clock cable s The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4 .0 ft), or NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connectin g each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on th e DDP2 faceplate to the primary or secondary source ports on Cl[...]

Page 336 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable • NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable External MSDL cable The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D80 MSDL card. The cable is available in four different sizes: • NTCK80AA (6 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable • N[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 337 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cable diagrams Figure 73 on page 338 and Figure 7 4 on page 339 provide examples of typical cabling configur ations for the DDP2 . Figure 73 shows a typ ical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection between the I/O panel and a Network C[...]

Page 338 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 73 DDP2 cable for systems with an I /O panel LED's Switch DCH Trunk 553-8489 clk0 Port 0 clk1 clk0 Port 1 clk1 NCTE (MDF or L TU) NCTE NT8D7217 cable NT8D7217 cable Clock Controllers NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable NTCK80 cable to MSDL or NTCK48 cable to DCHI[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 339 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 74 DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel LED's Switch DCH Trunk 553-7400 clk0 Unit 0 clk1 clk0 Unit 1 clk1 NCTE (MDF or L TU) Clock Controllers NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable NTCK80 cable to MSDL or NTCK48 cable to DCHI NT6D80 MSDL or NT6D11AF/NT5K7[...]

Page 340 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description NT5D97 circuit card locations Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the network bu s. Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2 card, the D-channel Han[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 341 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The following parameters are set by D IP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up. LBO Setting S5 S11 S6 S12 S7 S13 Receiver Interf ace S8 S14 General Pur pose S9 S15 T able 12 1 DIP switch settings f or NT5D97AA/AB (P a rt 2 of 2) Card Tr u n k s [...]

Page 342 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 75 Dip switches fo r NT5D97AA/AB[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 343 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB Impedance le vel and unit mode The S9/S15 switch selects the imped ance level and loop operation mo de on DEI2 OR PRI 2. Refer to Table 1 22. Transmission mode A per-trunk switch (S4/S1 0) provides selection of the digi[...]

Page 344 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Do not change this setup. Receiver impedance A per-trunk set of four D IP switches (S 8/S14 provides selection b etween 75 or 120 ohm values. Refer to Table 125. Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB A set of four Dip switches (S2) select s which Ring lines [...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 345 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for NT5D97AA/AB In case of an on-board NTBK51AA D-ch annel daugh terboard, set of four switches (S3) provid e the daughterb oard address. Refer to Table 134 on page 350 . Note: Switch 8 of S3 (S3-8) does no[...]

Page 346 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 2 OFF ON OF F OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON Note 1: The system contains a maxim[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 347 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D97AD DIP switch settings The the NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk parameters set tings for port0 and port1 respectively. Ad ditionally, the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of fo ur DIP switches for the Ring Grou nd se[...]

Page 348 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 76 Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD 1 234 S2 123 4 S10 1 234 S3 123 4 S13 1 234 S4 123 4 S14 1 234 S5 123 4 S15 1 234 S6 123 4 S1 1 123 4 S7 1234 S12 1234 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 S8 1234 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 S9 123 4 S1 6 S1 NT 5D97A D P2 P1 Fac e P l a t e 1A B 60 AB 1[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 349 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD Trunk 0 switches Switch S12 gives the MPU information ab out its environment. Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode. Switch S3 , S4 , and S5 select LBO function. T able 13 0 General purpose switches f or NT5D97 AD Switch[...]

Page 350 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Switch S6 selects the Receiver interface. Trunk 1 switc hes for NT5D97AD Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground. When set to ON, the ring line is grounded. T able 13 3 Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD Imped[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 351 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughterboard for NT5D97AD Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA DCH daught er card address. Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51 AA daug hter card is used. S8_1-10 can be set to OFF position. T able 13 6 NTBK51AA DCH switches [...]

Page 352 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 MSDL external card Use Table 138 to set the card address. T able 13 7 Switch settings f or MSDL external car d Switch number Function S9_1-10 X S8_1-10 X Ta b l e 1 3 8 Switch setting f or MSD L external car d (Part 1 of 2) Switc h Setting DNUM (LD 17) 1234 0 OFF[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 353 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Architecture Clock operation There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode. Tracking mo de In tracking mo de, the DDP2 loop suppli es an external clock reference to a clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in trackin g mode, wi[...]

Page 354 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Reference clock errors CS 10 00 Release 4.5 soft ware checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock controller or reference-clock erro r has occurred. (The interv al of this check can be configured in LD 73). In tracking mode, at any one time, ther e i[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 355 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation system switches to the back-up clock controller, wit hout affecting which reference clock is being tracked. A reference-clock error occurs when ther e is a problem with the clock driver or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detect[...]

Page 356 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Automatic clock switching If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or secondary reference clock is automatically swi tched in the following m anner: • If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it switches t[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 357 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 139 summarizes the clocking options. Tab le 140 on page 358 explains the options in more detail . T able 13 9 Clock Contr oller options - summar y CC Option CPU T ype Notes Option 1 Single Ref from P0 on Clk0 Ref from P1 on Clk0 Option 2 Dual Ref from P0[...]

Page 358 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 T able 14 0 Clock Controller options - de scription Clock Option Notes Option 1 This opti on provides a single CPU system with 2 cloc k sources derived from the 2 por ts of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a cl[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 359 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Operation The following discussion descri bes possible scenarios when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PR I2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual PRI card configuratio n with a NT5D 97 DDP2 card confi guration. Figure 78 Clock Cont roller – Option 1 55[...]

Page 360 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 79 Clock Cont roller – Option 2 553-7403 Primar y Ref erence Po r t 0 DDP2 Po r t 1 Clock Controller f or CPU 0 Clock Controller f or CPU 1 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 J1 Sec. J2 Prim. J1 Sec. J2 Prim. Primar y Ref[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 361 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 80 Clock Cont roller – Option 3 553-7404 Primar y Ref erence Po r t 0 DDP2 Po r t 1 Clock Controller f or CPU 0 Clock Controller f or CPU 1 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 J1 Sec. J2 Prim. J1 Sec. J2 Prim. Primar y [...]

Page 362 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital trunks. In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single DDP2 card, which is plugged into the netw ork shelf in the QPC414 slot. Case 2 - One port of the Q PC[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 363 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Case 3 - The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is connected to a digital trunk, and the s econd is connected to a peripheral buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. Th e digital trunks are located in a shelf that provide[...]

Page 364 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 8 Run and connect the NT5D97 cables. 9 If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 10 If required, designate connecti ng bl ocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 11 If required, install a Network Cha[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 365 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 3 If the NT5D97 card is being comple tely removed, not replaced, remove data from memory. 4 Remove cross connecti ons at MDF to wall-mounted cross-conn ect terminal. 5 Tag and disconne ct cables from card. 6 Rearrange Clock Controller cab les if required. 7 Re[...]

Page 366 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected when configuring a new DCH i n LD 17 (in resp onse to[...]

Page 367 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 368 NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 368 of 906 NT5K02 Fl exible Analog L ine card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line car d can be used for th e following applications: • NT5K02AA high-voltage Message Waiti ng analog line card typically used in Australia • NT5K02DA ground button , low-voltage Message Waiting, analo g line card [...]

Page 369 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 378 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 MFC signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 370 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Signaling levels MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided into two levels: • Level 1: used when a call is first estab lished and may be used to send th e dialed digits. • Level 2: used after Leve l 1 signaling is completed and may cont[...]

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 371 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation MFC signaling involves two or m ore levels of forward signals and two or more levels of backward signals. Separate sets of frequencies are used for forward and backward signals: • Forward signals. Level I forward sign als are dialed addres s digits that identify the ca[...]

Page 372 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The exact meaning of each MFC signal nu mber (1-15) within each level can be programmed separately for each trunk route using MFC. This programming can be done by the custo mer and allows users to suit the needs of each MFC-equipped trunk route. Each MFC-equipped trunk rout[...]

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 373 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Sender and receiver mode The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system’s CPU and the trunk circuit which uses MFC or MFE signaling . The XMFC/MFE circuit card transmits and receives forward and backward signals simultaneo usly on two channels . Ea[...]

Page 374 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 XMFC sender and receiver specifications Table 143 and Table 144 provi de the operating requirements for the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card. These specifi cations conform to CCITT R2 recommendations: Q.44 1, Q.442, Q .451, Q.454, an d Q.455. Ta b l e 1 4 3 XMFC sender specifications F[...]

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 375 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation XMFE sender and receiver specifications Tables 145 and Table 146 on page 376 provide the operat ing requirements for the XMFC/MFE card when it is co nfigured as an XMFE card. These requirements conform to French So cotel specifications ST/PAA /CLC/CER/ 692. T one Interr [...]

Page 376 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Physical specifications Table 147 outlines the physical speci fications of the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE circuit card. Ta b l e 1 4 6 XMFE receiver specifications Input sensitivity: accepted: rejected: rejected: rejected: -4 dBm to -35 dBm +/- 10 Hz of nom inal -42 dBm signals -4 dBm[...]

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 377 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet (Slots 1-10) P ow er requirements 1.1 Amps typica l Environmental considerations Meets the environment of th e system T able 14 7 Ph ysical sp ecificat ions (P ar t 2 of 2)[...]

Page 378 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 379 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 384 NT6D70 SILC Line card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 380 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set- up, signaling and other user data across the network. One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversati ons to the same or t[...]

NT6D70 SILC Line card Page 381 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation A logical terminal is any terminal that can communi cate with the system over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly con nected through a comm on physical termination. The length of a DSL depends on the speci[...]

Page 382 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers. IPE interface logic The IPE interface logic co nsists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus interface, a maintenance si gnali[...]

NT6D70 SILC Line card Page 383 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The transceiver circuits provide fou r-wir e full-duplex S/T bus interface. This bus supports multiple physical terminat ions on one DSL where each physical termination su pports multiple log ical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI terminals. Idle ci rcuit-switch ed B-cha[...]

Page 384 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 385 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 388 NT6D71 UILC Line card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 386 of 906 NT6D71 UILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power consumption Power consumptio n is +5 V at 1900 mA. Functional description Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and suppo rts one physical ter mination. This term ination can b e to a Network Term ination (NT1) or directly to a single U interface[...]

NT6D71 UILC Line card Page 387 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The serial control interface is an IP E bus that communicates with the U transceivers. IPE interface logic The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel inte rface, a digital pad, and a clock converter. Th[...]

Page 388 of 906 NT6D71 UILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 389 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 426 NT6D80 MSDL card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 390 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 that support the same functions. For ex ample, three cards sup ported with the MSDL (NT6D80) are QPC757 (DCHI) , QPC513 (ESDI), QPC841 (SDI) and NTSD12 (DDP). Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of ports supported by a system equipped with MSD L [...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 391 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 8 2 MSDL component layout 553-5431 S9 S10 Ones Tens Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Monitor Port LED S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Card Address Switches DCE DCE DCE DCE DTE DTE DTE DTE 422 232 422 232 422 232 422 232[...]

Page 392 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description Figure 83 on page 393 illu strates the MSDL functional blo ck diagram. The MSDL card is divided into fo ur major fu nctional blocks: • CPU bus interface • Micro Processing Unit (MPU) •M e m o r y • Serial interface Two processing units serve as th[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 393 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 83 MSDL block diagram Address Buffer and Decoding Logic Control and Data Transceivers Interface Registers Micro Processing Unit (68020 MPU) MPU Address Decoding Logic Shared Resource Arbitrator Memory Address Counter & Buffer Shared Memory Integrated Serial Commun[...]

Page 394 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Micro Processing Unit (MPU) The MPU, which is based on a Motoro la 68020 processor, coordinates and controls data transfer and port addressing, commun icating via the CPU bus with the system. Priorit ized interrupts tel l the MPU which tasks to perfo rm. Memory The MSDL card co[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 395 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Equipment emulatio n mode – Configure an MSD L port to emulate DCE or DTE by setting switches on the car d and downloading LD 17 interface parameters. I/O port electrical interface – Each MSDL port can be configured as an RS-232 or RS-422 int erface by sett ing the switc[...]

Page 396 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 84 MSDL functio nal block diagram AML Loadware CPU Bus Boot Code & Loader Modules MSDL Handler System Interface Module Physical Layer (Layer 1) Handler P S O S + Meridian Mail PRI Trunk PRI Trunk System software MSDL software modules Application Module Link D-Channel[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 397 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Data flow The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data from the system to the MSDL. This in terface receives packetized data from the system and stores it in the tran sm it buffer on the MSDL. The transmit buffer transports these mes sages to th e app[...]

Page 398 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card mix A system that exclusively uses MSDL cards can support up to 16 such cards, providing 64 ports. These ports can be used to run various synchronous and asynchronous operations simult aneously. The system will also support a mix of interface cards (MSDL, DCHI, and ESDI fo[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 399 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 148 lists the synchronous inte rface specifications and the means of configuring the interface parameters. Asynchronous transmi ssion uses an intern al clock to generate the appropriate baud rate for s erial controllers. Table 149 lists asynchronou s interface specific[...]

Page 400 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Emulation mode Each port can be configured to emulate a DCE port or a DTE port by setting the appropriate swit ches on the MSDL. For details on how to set the switches, refer to “Instal lation” on page 404 of this docum ent. DCE is a master o r controlling device that is us[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 401 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 151 on page 402 lists R S-422 interface speci fications for EIA circuits. It shows the connector pin number, th e associated signal name, and the 3 Receive Data (RX) BB 104 X 4 Request to Send (RTS) CA 105 X 5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB 106 X 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) CC 107 [...]

Page 402 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 supported circui t type. It also indi cates whether the signal originates at the DTE or DCE device. Implementation guidelines The following are guidelines for en gineering and managing MSDL cards: • An MSDL can be i nstalled in any emp ty network card slot. T able 15 1 RS-422[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 403 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • A maximum of eight MSDL cards can be installed in a fully occupied module becau se of the module’ s power supply limitations. • The Clock Controller card should not be installed in a module if more than 10 MSDL ports are configured as active RS-232 (rather than RS-42[...]

Page 404 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The internal power supply in each m odule provides DC power for the MSDL and other cards. Powe r consumpt ion and h eat dissipat ion for the MSDL is listed in Tab le 153. Installation Device number Before installing MS DL cards, determin e which of the devices in the system are[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 405 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation settings shown in this figure are an exam ple of the different types of interfaces available. Your system settings may differ. T able 15 4 MSDL interface switc h settings DCE swi tc h DTE swit ch Interf ace Comment OFF OFF RS-232 DTE/DCE is software configured OFF ON RS-422 [...]

Page 406 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 85 MSDL switch setting example S9 S10 Ones Tens Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Monitor Port LED S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Care Locking Device Card Address Select Switches I/O Port Interface Configuration DIP Switches Setting for an RS-232 interface DTE[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 407 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Installing the MSDL card Pr ocedure 16 Installing the MSDL card To install an MSDL card follow these steps: 1 Set Device Numb er S10 an d S9. 2 Hold the MSDL by its ca rd-locking devices. Squee ze the tabs to unlatch the card locking devices and l ift the locking device out [...]

Page 408 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Cable requirements The MSDL card includes four high- density 26-pin (SCSI II) female connectors for ports and one 8-pin miniatu re DIN connector for the mo nitor port. See Figure 86 o n page 409 for a diagram of the MSDL cabling configuration. A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 409 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 86 MSDL cabling I/O panel I/O panel Q P C 7 2 0 M S D L ESDI to I/O cable (NTND27AB—6 ft.) RS-232 shielded (QCAD328— 35 ft. max.) NTND27 ISL APL applications (RS-232 cable) SDI to terminal cable PRI to I/O panel cable (NTND98AA) NTND25AA—6 ft. NTND26AB—18 ft. [...]

Page 410 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. For ex ample, the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection . If the modem is v.35, a customized or external ve ndor cable is required. Cable installation When the MSD[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 411 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 5 Plug the DB15 male connector end of the cable into the J5 DB15 female connector on the PRI card. 6 Secure the connections in place with their fa steners. 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each connection. End of Procedure I/O panel connections Operations aside from PRI requir[...]

Page 412 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 MSDL planning form Use the following planning fo rm to help sort and store informatio n concerning the MSDL cards in your syst em as sho wn in the sam ple. Record switch settings for unequip ped ports as well as for equipped ports. MSDL data form Device no. Shelf Sl ot Card ID [...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 413 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Maintenance Routine maintenance consists of en abling and disabling MSDL cards and downloading new versio ns of peripheral software. These activities are perform ed by an auth orized perso n such as a system administrator. Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of dete rmining pr[...]

Page 414 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 A newly configured MSDL auto matically enters the manually disabled state. An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuin g the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 87). Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and stops[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 415 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation System disa bled When the system disables the MSDL card (step 4 in Figure 87 on page 414 ), it continues to communicate and attempt maintenance procedures on the card. To stop all system communication with the card, enter DIS MSDL x to disable it (step 5 in Figu re 87 o n pa[...]

Page 416 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Recovery Threshold The MSDL card was successfully enabled by the MSDL autorecovery function five t imes within 30 m inutes. Each tim e it was system disabled because of a pr oblem encountered during operation. • Bootloading The MSDL base software is in the process of bein[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 417 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Manually controlled maintenance Use manual maintenance com mands found in the following programs to enable, disable, reset, get the status of, and perform self-tests on the MSDL card: • Input/Output Diagno stic Program LD 37 •P r o g r a m L D 4 2 • Link Diagnostic Pro[...]

Page 418 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Disabling the MSDL To disable an MSDL card, enter DIS MSDL x . To disable the MSDL and all its ports, enter DIS MSDL x ALL . Resetting the MSDL To reset an MSDL and initiate a limited self-test, the MSDL must be in a manually disabled state. To perform th e reset, enter RST MSD[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 419 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Manually isolating and correcting faults Problems are due to configuratio n erro rs that occur during installation or hardware faults resulting from component failure during operation. See “Symptoms and actions” on page 422 for more information on problem symptoms and re[...]

Page 420 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Previously operating MSDL cards Problems that occur during normal oper ation usually result from faulty cards. Follow these steps to evaluate the situation: 1 Use the STAT MSDL x command to check MS DL card status. See “Displaying MSDL status” on page 418 . 2 If the card ha[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 421 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Replacing MSDL cards After completing MSDL troubleshoo ting you may determine that one or m ore MSDL cards are defective. Remove the defec tive cards and replace them with new ones. Pr ocedure 19 Replacing an MSDL card An MSDL card can be removed from and inserted into a sys[...]

Page 422 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Symptoms and actions Explained here are some of the sy mptoms, diagnoses, and actions requ ired to resolve MS DL card pr oblems. Cont act you r Nortel representative for further assistance. These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an ena[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 423 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation System disabled actions These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state foll owing system disabling. SYSTEM D ISABLED—NOT RESPO NDING Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to resp ond to the messages from the [...]

Page 424 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 using autorecovery. If a diagnostic program (overlay ) is active, th e downloadi ng of the MSD L base code occurs la ter. Action : Wait to see if the s ystem will enab le the card immediately. If the MSDL is enabled, no further action is necessary. If the MSDL base code downloa[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 425 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation SYSTEM D ISABLED—OVE RLOAD Cause: The system received an excessive number of mess ages from the MSDL card in a certain t ime. If th e card invokes overload four times in 30 minutes, it exceeds the recovery th reshold as described in “SYSTEM DISABLED—RECOVERY THRESHOLD.[...]

Page 426 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 SYSTEM D ISABLED—FATAL ERROR Cause: The MSDL card encountered a fatal error and canno t recover. The exact reason for the fatal erro r is shown in the MSDL300 error message output to the console of TTY when the error occurred. Action: Check the MSDL300 message to find out the[...]

Page 427 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 526 NT7D16 Data Access card Content list The following are the t opics in this section: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 428 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Introduction The NT7D16 Data Access card (DAC) is a data interface card that integrates the functionality of the QPC723A RS-232 4-Port Interface Line card (RILC) and the QPC430 Asynchr onous Interface Line card (AILC). This combination allows the NT7D16 DAC to work with [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 429 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Wire test mode • Self diagnostics • Inbound modem po oling with any asynchronous modems • Outbound modem pooling using “dumb” mo dems • Outbound modem pooling using auto dialin g modems Controls and indicators The LEDs on the DAC faceplate indicat e th[...]

Page 430 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Port mode This lamp lights to indicate that the port indi cated is in RS-422 mode. If the lamp is dark, the specified port is in RS-23 2-C mode. Port number The number displayed specifies the port driving the EIA signal LEDs mentioned above. The push-but ton switch below[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 431 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 8 8 NT7D16 Data Acces s card faceplate SD RD DTR DSR DCD RI CONNECT RS-422 2 UN SEL WIRE TEST UN0 UN1 UN2 UN3 UN4 UN5 NT7D16AA card status EIA signal monitor LEDs CONNECT P or t mode P or t number P or t select Wire test 553-5018 ON OFF[...]

Page 432 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Call Set-up abort The user may abandon the call during th e dialogue phase using one of the following m ethods: • Terminal off-line This method is useful fo r RS-232-C interface only. The equipment drops Data Term inal Ready (DTR) to indicate an idle connection. For ex[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 433 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If this feature is active, and th e port is connected to a DTE that holds DTR O FF when idle, the port w ill be perman ently busied ou t to inbound calls fol lowing the DTR timeout peri od. Inactivity timeout Once a successful data call is completed, the user&ap[...]

Page 434 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 CTS Clear T o Send 5 3 — DSR Data Set Ready 6 4 — DCD Carrier De tect 8 5 — DTR Data T erm inal Ready 20 6 — RI Ring Indicator 22 7 — T able 15 6 Wire te st signa l leads c ycle co unts Label EIA Signal Lead description Pin Cyc le count RS-232-C RS-422 Note: Th[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 435 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Independent storage of dialing parameters Two dialing parameters, DCD control, and Answ er mode, can be modified by both keyboard and Hayes dialin g commands. The Hayes dialing mode also allows the user to modify the Inp ut echo control, and Prompt/Result codes transm[...]

Page 436 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The fourth mode, gatewa y, is a subset of the modem mode and is not normally used. This mode is useful if the attach ed modems do not have Ring Indi cator lead. The application used is inboun d modem pooling. The different modes enable the DAC to connect to different typ[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 437 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 2 (DTE) OFF “Host On” (RI) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Modem P ool inbound and outbound (f or Ha yes 1200 modem) MSB b y RI 3 (DTE) OFF “Host On” (RI) ON Fo r c e d ON Hotline Modem P ool inbound only (Hotline for Ha yes 1200 modem only) 4 (DTE) ON “K eybo[...]

Page 438 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 6 (DTE) ON “KBD On” (No RI) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Gatew a y inbound and outb ound (DTR is on in idle state) MSB by DCD 7 (DTE) ON “KBD On” (No RI) ON Fo r c e d ON Hotline Gatew a y inbound only (Hotline by DCD: ON f or Hotline OFF f or VLL) (DTR is ON in[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 439 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 10 (DCE) OFF “Host On” (prompts off) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Host similar to MCDS but does not require DTR to be ON Modes 8, 9, 10, and 11 are f or RS232 Host connectivity 11 (DCE) OFF “Host On” (prompts off) ON Fo r c e d On Hotline Continuous Hotline m[...]

Page 440 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Selecting the proper m ode for Modem connectivity Select modes 0, 1, 2, and 3 when the DAC is connected to different types of modems for inboun d and outbound m odem pooling. In these mo des, the DAC operates as a DTE, monitors the DSR, DC D, and RI control leads, and dr[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 441 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the case of ou tbound modem pooling, the DA C answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON (modes 0 and 1). Then the calling data module and the DAC form a transparent link betw een the calling DTE and the modem. The DTE user may then enter the appr opriate com[...]

Page 442 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 0 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to a modem, except Hayes-1200, for inbound and out bound modem pooling (see mo des 2 and 3 for Hayes-1200 modem ). The modem used should have the followin g features: Auto-answer capability This feature is re[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 443 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Auto-dial capability This feature is required when the modem is used for outbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to go off-h ook and dial the remote number (such as Smartm odem Hayes-2400 or Bizcomp). Auto-reset capabilit y This feature is required when the modem [...]

Page 444 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Programing DAC for mo de 0 in service ch ange LD11 When used for in bound or outbo und Modem Pool only, the DA C can be configured as R232 in LD11. When used for bot h inbound and o utbound Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232; station hu nting for the outbound[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 445 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 90 DAC to Modem Pool connectivity System Outbound hunting Inbound hunting DAC R232 por t 0 500/2500 line card Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Modem 1 Modem 2 Modem 3 Modem 4 553-AAA1126 R232 por t 1 R232 por t 2 R232 por t 3[...]

Page 446 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 1 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to an auto-answer modem for inbou nd Hotline operation. In th is mode, the DAC au tomatically executes Hotline operation when RI is driven ON by t he modem. The modem used should have the following features: [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 447 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Programing DAC for mode 1 i n service change LD11 The DAC must be configured as R232 (t he Autodial feature key is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an Asynchronous Data Module (ADM) trunk . Mode 2 This mode should be selected when the DAC is conn[...]

Page 448 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: If Call Detail Recording (CDR) i s required, use separate outbound and inbound Modem Po ols. Mode 3 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a Hayes-1200 modem for inbound Hot line operation. It is recommended that mode 1 be used for inbound Hotl i[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 449 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • The equipment can monitor the DTR lead (optio nal, depending on the mode selected). In modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, the DAC: • operates as a DTE • monitors the DSR • monitors DCD contro l leads • drives the DTR lead The RI lead is ignored. No menus or prompts are[...]

Page 450 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 4 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to a gateway for inbound and out bound operation. The characterist ics of the gateways to be used with this mode are: Auto-answer ca pability This feature is required wh en the gateway i s used for inbound op[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 451 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the outbou nd operatio n, the DAC dr ives the DT R lead OFF un til another DM calls it for outbound accessing. The DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON. The calling DM is then transparently connected to the gateway. The DAC requires the gateway to d[...]

Page 452 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 5 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to an auto-answer gateway for inbound Hotli ne operation. In this mo de, the DAC automati cally executes Hotline operation when DCD is driven ON by the gateway. If the DM being called by t he Hotline operatio[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 453 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Programing DAC for mode 6 i n service change LD 11 When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbou nd gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as [...]

Page 454 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 go ON for 2 seconds and th en OFF for 4 seconds until the call is answered by the host. When the host turns DTR ON, the DAC answers the call. If DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON. If DTR was already ON, the DAC does not drive R[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 455 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Dynamic control of DTR This feature is required only if the host must be capable of releasing an established call. The hos t should be able to drop an established data call by driving D TR OFF for more than 100 ms. Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON , then Mak[...]

Page 456 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Programing DAC for mo de 9 in service ch ange LD 11 The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 (the Autodial feature is used for this mode). The DAC must not be config ured as an ADM trunk. Mode 10 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host for inbo[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 457 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host and continuous Hotline op eration is required. In this mode, the DAC repeatedly tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is ON. When the DA C tries to Hotline to a busy Dat a Modul e, it activa[...]

Page 458 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 unless the DTR lead is driven ON by the terminal. Any terminal that drives the DTR lead ON can be used with this mode (such as VT100 or VT102). The DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a cal l is dropped or when control—Z i s entered durin g the idle state. In [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 459 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 13 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal (DTE) and Hotline call or igination is required. This mo de is similar to the operation of the ASIM when set to not-forced-DTR and Ho tline. In this mode, the terminal is able to Hotline to a[...]

Page 460 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 15 This mode provides a “virtual leased line” and the meaning of the “Forced DTR” switch is re-defined. This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal (DTE) and conti nuous Hotline call origina tion is required. In this mod e, the DAC r[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 461 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If AUTB is set to ON, the BAUD parameter is not prompted. If AUTB is set to OFF, you may select a fixed baud rate in response to the prompt BAUD. When the DAC receives a call, it adapts to the caller’s baud rate. See Table 158 for connect and disconnect protoc[...]

Page 462 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Outbound mod em pooling: Local DM user calls to the outbound modem access number . D AC ans wers the outbound call and dr ives DTR ON. Modem receives DTR and prepares to receive commands. Local DM user enters the prop er commands f or calling the remote modem. Remote mod[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 463 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 1 Inbound Hotline modem pools Inbound Hotline modem pool ing: Most dumb modems can be used f or this applicatio n. Modem sends r ing/no r ing cycle (2 seco nds ON, 4 seconds OFF) to initiate connection. D AC responds b y tr ying to establish a Hotline call to a s[...]

Page 464 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 3 Inbound Hotline modem pools (with forced DTR) Use this mode with Hay es 1200 modem. Inbound Hotli ne modem pooling: The D AC operation is identical to mode 1 e xcept that DTR is alwa ys f orced ON (e xcept dur ing disconnect). Call disconnection: Disconnection is [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 465 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call disconnection (D A C): D A C drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call. The Gatew ay m ust drop DCD . D AC drops DTR if the D A C receives a long break or three shor t breaks. The Gate wa y must drop DCD . Call disconnection (Gate way): Gatew a y drops DCD (D[...]

Page 466 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 6 Inbound and Outbound Gatew ay ac cess (with f orced DTR) Inbound an d Outbound Gate way pr otocol: The D AC operation is identical to mode 4 e xcept that DTR is alwa ys f orced ON (e xcept dur ing disconnect). The establis hment of the outbound call does not requi[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 467 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 8 Host access f or call ori gination and answering Host answering an in coming data call: Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection. D AC responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds and OFF f or 4 seconds until the Host ans wers b y turn ing DT[...]

Page 468 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Call disconnect i on (D A C): D AC drops DSR, DCD , and CTS if the local DM user releases the call. The Host sho uld then drop the call. D AC drops DSR, DCD , and CTS if the Host sends a long break or three shor t breaks. The Host should then drop the call. Call disconne[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 469 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 10 Host access f or call ori gination and answering (with f orced DTR) Host access for call origination and answering: The D AC operation is identical to mode 8 except DTR is alwa ys considered ON, ev en when the Host is dr iving DTR OFF . Call disconnection: D A[...]

Page 470 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 12 T erminal access for call orig ination and answering T erminal answ ering an incoming data call: D A C dr iv es DSR, DCD , and CTS ON in the idle state. Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection. D AC responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 471 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call disconnection (terminal): T er minal toggl es DTR from ON to OFF (DTR must be OFF f or 100 ms or more). The D A C tur ns DSR, DCD , and CTS OFF f or 0.2 second and then ON. T er minal sends a long break or three shor t breaks. The D A C tur ns DSR, DCD , and CTS [...]

Page 472 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Keyboard dialing Keyboard dialin g is an inter active dialogue mode between the connected equipment and the DAC. This dialogu e allows equipment to give dialing commands to the DAC in order to make a data call to another far-end data port. Keyboard dialing supports a mod[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 473 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Autoparity to ensure that the keyboard dialing menu is readable on the data terminal during the interactive dialogue mo de • Originating calls to local and rem ote hosts • Ring Again • Speed Call • Two answer modes for incomin g calls: manual and auto • [...]

Page 474 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Prompts Call processing prompts are i n upper case letters only. Other p rompts consist of both upper and lower case characters , and the dial ogue session dep icts the actual upper/lower case letters used. All prompts are preceded by the Carr iage Return and Line Feed A[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 475 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Keyboard Autobaud is allowed after th e call is placed in off-line mode. Note: If the Hayes autobaud characters A or a are sent, the DAC will enter Hayes dialing mode. Autobaud char acter detection is selected in the software. Auto parity The user can override the dow[...]

Page 476 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Whenever a Primary command is expected, the user may enter the Parity command (period). If Auto Parity h as already been done, the Invalid Command menu i s presented: The user's port may be set to idle by entering CTRL Z. Any call in progress will be dropped, and an[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 477 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Autodial (A) The Autodial command allows the user to dial a predefined number stored within the local system . The DAC will autom atically attem pt to place a data call to the A utodial numb er: The currently stored Autodi al number may be viewed by entering the pri m[...]

Page 478 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 if the access code is less than the maxi mum number of digits allowed for the Speed Call list for the associated data DN (DDN). Note: If the Speed Call feature key is not defined in the software, you will be notified by the follo wing: Feature key Speed Call not defined.[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 479 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation By entering S on the keyboard, you enter the Speed Call Modi fy menu. The Speed Call number can also be change d in t he software. Respond to the following prom pts to change the S peed Call number. By entering R on the keyboard, you enter th e Remote Loopback Modify [...]

Page 480 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 of rings. Respond to the following prompts to enab le or disable the Manual Answer feature. By entering D on the keyboard, you enter the DCD Modify menu. Resp ond to the following prompts to enable DCD as Forced or Dynamic. M <CR> Current Ans wer Mode: Manual A u t[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 481 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation By entering L on the keyboard, you enter the Long Break Detect Modify menu. Respond to the following promp ts to enable or disable the detectio n of the Long Break as an abandon signal. To exit the Modify menu, ente r Q. This entry returns you to the Primary commands [...]

Page 482 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: If you hang up the call, or give an abandon comm and, Ring Again is canceled. If a Ring Again request has already b een placed, the DAC offers the option of overriding the previous request. When the called DN becomes available, the system notifies the DAC, wh ich t[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 483 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Again prompt within a so ftware determined time peri od, Ring Again is canceled, and the Primary Commands Menu appears. Note 1: If t he Ring Ag ain no tice occurs during a parameter change, the prompt only appears after the chan ge has been completed. Note 2: If the n[...]

Page 484 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Not in service When the DAC attempts a call to a DN th at is not supported, it sends you a message. The call is released, and you must reenter the Au tobaud character <CR> to initiate keyboard dialing again. No response from the system Likewise, when the DAC receiv[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 485 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Hayes dialing Like keyboard d ialing, Hayes dialin g is an interact ive dialing mode with the terminating equipment connected to th e NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC ). In addition to the common parameters and functions, t he Hayes dialing m ode offers the following feat[...]

Page 486 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 — the DTE mode, and RI has cycled the appropr iate number of times and DCD is asserted on by the modem Note: In Gateway mode, DCD must be asserted on. In modem mode, only RI must be on. The DAC asserts DTR to the modem, and awaits DCD from the modem. Input requirements[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 487 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Result codes and messages Each input record genera tes a result code which is sent t o the user. Only one code is sent regardless of the number of commands in the record. The reply is in one of two formats: • Numeric replies contain a one- or two-num ber code • Ve[...]

Page 488 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Baud rate detection Every command line begins with Baud rate detection. This phase allows the DAC to determine the user equipment baud rate. During this phase, the DAC accepts only the ASCII “A,” or “a” characters. Once a valid autobaud character is detected, the[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 489 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: The pari ty determ ined here overri des the parity downloaded from the system. Also, the T (t) must be entered in the same case as the A (a). If you entered upp ercase A for the Baud Rate, you must en ter upper case T for the parity. Dialing operation Like keybo[...]

Page 490 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 For the purpos es of this document, when illu strating the prompt /response sequences, the bold type is what the u ser enters on t he keyboard. All ot her type represents the DAC output. Li kewi se, “xxxxxxx,” “yyyyy yy,” or “zzzzzzz” represents numbers enter[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 491 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation All S registers may be changed with the exception of S1, the Rin g count. If an attempt is made to change this parameter, the command is accepted but no action is taken. The Ring count is the number of 6-seco nd intervals that have expired since an inbound call has be[...]

Page 492 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 You can view any of the S registers by issuing the following display command. Any S register can be specified through the ATS command, and the system will display the cu rrent setting for th at parameter. More than one S register can be viewed by listing th e desired reg[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 493 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Reset Hayes parameters All of the Hayes dialing param eters and S registers remain even after the data call is complete. Similarly, if the dialing mode, keyboard to Hayes or vice versa, are changed, the parame ters remain as specified. The following command allows you[...]

Page 494 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 V 1 Result codes sent in V erbose format X 1 Features selection 0 - 8, 10 - 13 P — Dial metho d (pulse) S0 0 *?1 Manual Answ er (if 0)?A uto ans wer on 1 r ing S1 0 Ring count 0 S2 43 Escape sequence character Plus sign (+) S3 13 T er minator ch aracter Carr iage Retur[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 495 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outbound calls The DAC supports two types of outbound data calls: • point-to-point data calls • calls sent through a modem withou t call origination capabilities Hayes dialing do es not provid e for any alterations during cal l processing, Ring Again, or Controlle[...]

Page 496 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Issuing the On Hook comman d while the call is still ringing disco nnects the incoming call. The DAC discon nects the call and notifies you with a NO CARRIER message. When the S0 register is set to 0, the DAC is set to manual answer, and an inbound call mu st be an swere[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 497 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the following example, <GT> is the Guard Time and <EC> the Escape Character defined in the S2 register. The example shows the Off Line escape sequence, the command to display an S register (Ring Count, in this case), and the command to go back on lin e [...]

Page 498 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 System parameters System parameters downloaded by the switch include the type of system, the inactivity timer, and the data DN. These parameters are described below: • System type: CS 1000S, CS 1000M, an d Meridian 1 • Inactivity timeout — No timeout — 15 minutes[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 499 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — Hotline (call the Autod ial number upon connection) • Wire test — Disabled (can be invoked only with front panel switch) — Enabled ( start only i f the DAC f irmware is id le) • Language — English — Quebec French • Keyboar d dialing — Enabled (allo[...]

Page 500 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 —D C E —D T E • Equipment typ e — Terminal (send prompts/replies) — Host (suppress prom pts/replies) • Long Break Detect In Figure 95 on page 501 and Figure 9 6 on page 502 , the rectangles represent the settings of service change paramete rs in LD 11 that af[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 501 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 95 Operating mo de selection—RS4 22 PRM = Off PRM = On OPE YES Host Vir tual Leased Line? Ye s No HO T = On DTR = On Hotline? HO T = On HO T = Off Ye s No Allow Autobaud? No A UTB = Off Select BA UD A UTB = On BA UD = 7 Ye s T er minal Set remaining Operate P[...]

Page 502 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 96 Operating mo de selection—RS-23 2-C Operate Mode? DEM = DTE PRM = On DEM = DCE PRM = Off DEM = DCE PRM = On OPE YES DEM = DTE PRM = Off Dynamic DCD? DCD = Off DCD = On Hotline? HOT = On A UTB = Off Select BA UD HOT = Off Virtual Leased Line? Hotline? HOT = Of[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 503 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Warning Tone Denied (WTD) defau lts if DTA is entered. • If the DAC is u sed to call o ut through mo dem pooling, wh ere the modem pool consists of dumb mode ms c onnected to QMT8 SADM or QMT12 V.35 SADM, the DAC port should be configured with a secondary DN, [...]

Page 504 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power supply Be sure that all power requirements are met before inst alling the DAC. Operation may be affected by improper power and environmental condit ions. EIA signals supported The DAC supports a subset of th e standard signals. Only 8 leads can be brought through t[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 505 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Environmental The DAC functions fully when operat ing within the following specified conditions. See Table 166. Reliability The DAC has a predicted mean time between failure (MTBF) of 8 years at 45 degrees Celsius. The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 1 hour. Installing [...]

Page 506 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Large System In Large System s, the DAC is fully supporte d in IPE modules. These special slots on the DAC have 24-pair cables pre-wired to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in card slot s 0-15. Any IPE sl ot will support th e first four ports on the DAC if connections a[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 507 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation An upgraded backplane has three shrouds for each card slot. A backplane that cannot be upgraded has only two shrouds for each card slot. Port configuration Figure 97 on page 508 sh ows the port configurations for both the RS-23 2-C and RS-422 por ts. The software conf[...]

Page 508 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 97 NT7D16 Data Access Card port c onnectors Note: Inser t only one option plug per por t. 553-5234 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 } } } } } } Po r t 0 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 Po r t 5[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 509 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabling Several cabling schemes are possible for bot h AILC and RILC modes. Typical capacitance for 24- and 26-gauge cables is shown in the Tables 168 and 169. RS-232 and RS-422 tran smission distance is limi ted by the electrical capacitance of the cable. Low-capacit[...]

Page 510 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 98 Cabling to the data equipment System I/O connector MDF (12 connectors total) 25 pair 25 pair P atch panel DB25 DB25 553-AAA1128 RJ-11 DB25 RS-232 RJ-11 AILU RS-422 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 25 pair Octopus cable 25 pair[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 511 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 99 shows a connection th rough an RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack located at the data station. It is recommended th at f our wires be used similarly to the AIM drop when using the RJ-11 jack. Another cabl e is required to convert the RJ-11 or RJ-4 5 into DB25. Note: It is [...]

Page 512 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Use an octop us cable that follows the pinout of the DAC, such as QCAD318A (female) and QCAD 319A (male), in conjunction with a 50-pin fem ale-to-fema le gender converter . Figure 10 0 Patch panel layout DB25 DB25 50-pin connector 50-pin connector 553-5021[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 513 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 10 1 Octopus cabling MDF TxD RxD GND DTR CTS DSR DCD RI TxD RxD GND DTR CTS DSR DCD RI EIA signals from the D AC (unit 0) EIA signals from the D AC (unit 5) 2 (TxD) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 20 (DTR) 5 (CTS) 6 (DSR) 8 (DCD) 22 (RI) 2 (TxD) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 20 (DTR) 5 (CTS[...]

Page 514 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Backplane pi nout and signaling Two 40-pin, and two 20-pin edge connect ors connect the card to the backplane. The detailed pinout configu rations are listed in Tables 170 and 171. Ta b l e 1 7 0 RS-232- C and RS-4 22 pinou ts f or first th ree D A C ports (P ar t 1 of 2[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 515 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 7R 7 O-R DSR1 6 8T 33 R-G RI1 22 8R 8 G-R CTS1 5 9T 34 R-BR UNIT 2 TD2 2 RD A2 9R 9 BR-R RD2 3 RDB2 10T 35 R-S DTR2 20 SD A2 10R 10 S-R GND2 7 SDB2 Connector 11T 36 BK-BL DCD2 8 3 11R 11 BL-BK DSR2 6 12T 37 BK-O RI2 22 12R 12 O-BK CTS2 5 T able 17 0 RS-232- C and RS-4[...]

Page 516 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 1 7 1 RS-232-C and RS-422 pino uts for last three DA C por ts (P ar t 1 of 2) I/O cable Unit no. RS-232-C RS-422 Signal P atch pair or octopu s Pa i r Pin Pa i r color Signal Pin no. 13T 38 BK-G UNIT 3 TD3 2 RDA3 13R 13 G-BK RD3 3 RDB3 14T 39 BK-BR DTR3 20 SD A3[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 517 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuring the Data Access card LD 11 must be configured to accept th e DAC. The commands listed here must be answered. LD 20 prints out card information when requested. For a complete list of the service change prompts and respo nses, see Software Input/Output : Adm[...]

Page 518 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 required. The defaults are bracketed, a nd ma y be issued by Carri age Return (<CR>). LD 11 – Configure Data Access ca rd. (Part 1 of 3) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG MO V COPY Add, change, mo v e or cop y the unit TYPE: R232 R422 RS-232-C unit RS-422 [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 519 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation HO T (OFF) ON Hotline If HO T = ON , then A UTB = OF F AU T (ON) OFF Automati c ans wer AU T B (ON) OFF A uto baud Prompt appears only if HO T - OFF BA UD 0-(7)-8 Baud rate, where: 0 = 110 1 = 150 2 = 300 3 = 600 4 = 1200 5 = 2400 6 = 4800 7 = 9600 8 = 19200 This prom[...]

Page 520 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DLNG (ENG) FRN Data por t languag e, where: ENG = English FRN = Quebec F rench KBD (ON) OFF K e yboard di aling, w here: ON = e nab led OFF = disabled (Ha yes dialing commands will still wor k) WIRE (OFF) ON Wire test mode, where: OFF = disabled ON = e nab led PBDO (OFF)[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 521 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Printing the card parameters (LD 20) By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can print out the configured parameters for each port , or the entire DAC. This is useful to determine if any parameters have been alt ered during keyboard or Hayes [...]

Page 522 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC The Apple Macintosh can be connected wi th twisted pair wire to a port of a NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) to allow access to the s witching capability. The Macintosh can then access local or remote terminals, personal computers, host[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 523 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 10 2 Macintosh to DAC connection —9-pin subminiature D Figure 10 3 Macintosh to DAC connection —mini-8 DIN Apple Macintosh 9-pin subminiature D 8 9 5 4 W BL BK Y RD A RDB SD A SDB MDF R3 T3 R2 T2 System D A C W BL BK Y 6-wire T eladapt cord 553-AAA1129 Appl[...]

Page 524 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Large System and CS 1000M HG upgrade The DAC can be installed directly into slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 with no cab ling changes. If other slots are required, the upgrade must be mad e. Follow this procedure to upgrade your cabling. You can upgrad e the cabling segment-by-segm[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 525 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Segment 2 1 Leave cable K as is in slot L8. 2 Move cable end L-3 to L9-3. 3 Remove cable M from the backplane and connect ends M-1, M-2, and M-3 to L10-1, L10-2, and L10-3 . 4 Add cable N to the I/O panel by connecting ends N-1, N-2, and N-3 to L11-1, L11-2, and L11-3[...]

Page 526 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Be sure to re-label the MDF to show that the module has been upgraded to provide one cable for each IPE slot. The resulting backplane and cable arrangement should look lik e this: Bac kplane slot-connector I/O panel cable position L0 A L1 B L2 C L3 D (ne w cable) L4 E L5[...]

Page 527 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 544 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 528 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The Digital Line card provides 16 voice and 16 data commu nication links. NT8D02 Digital Line card The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion . You can install this card in any IPE slot. NTDK16 Digital Line card [...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Li ne cards Page 529 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 10 4 Digital line card – faceplate 553-6160 Dgtl LC NT8D02 Rlse 04 Card lock latch Card lock latch LED[...]

Page 530 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description NT8D02 Digital Line card The NT8D02 digital line card is equipp ed with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multi plexed voice, data, an d signaling path t o and from d igital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compr[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Li ne cards Page 531 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 10 5 Digital line card – block diagram Digital line interface Micro- controller 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM DS-30X loop Card LAN link Power supplies Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip TCM loop interface circuit Digital phone lines Line interface u[...]

Page 532 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 digital li ne card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit provides a multi plexed voice, data, an d signaling path t o and from d igital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multi plexed (TC[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Li ne cards Page 533 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 10 6 NTDK16 DLC[...]

Page 534 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 lines carry multiplexed PC M voice, data, and signaling information as TCM loops. The purpose of each digital li ne interface circuit is to de-multiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into eight in te grated voice and data bitstreams. The circuits then tran[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Li ne cards Page 535 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card control functions Control functio ns are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the digital line card. A sanity tim er is provided to automatically reset the car d if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason. Microcontrolle[...]

Page 536 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced , it times out and causes the microcontroll er to be hardware reset. Circuit power The +15 V dc input is reg ulated down to +10 V dc for use by the d igital line interface circuits. Th[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Li ne cards Page 537 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Digital line interface specifications Table 173 provides a technical summary of the digital li ne cards. T able 17 3 NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line card technical summar y Chara cteristi cs NT8D02 DLC description NTDK16B A DLC description NTDK16AA DLC descri[...]

Page 538 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements The digital line card needs + 15V DC over each loop at a maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backpl ane. The line feed interface can supply power to one loop of varyi ng length up to 1070 m (3500 ft) using 24[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Li ne cards Page 539 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Environmental specifications Table 175 shows t he environmen tal specifications of the card. Connector pin assignments Table 176 shows the I/ O pin designations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as an 80-row by 2-colu mn array of pins. Normal[...]

Page 540 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 19B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip 63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line 9, Tip 64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip 65A Line 11, Ring 65B Lin[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Li ne cards Page 541 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration This section outlines the p r ocedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D02 Digit al Line card and configuring th e system software to properly recognize th e card. Figure 107 o n page 542 shows where the switches and jump[...]

Page 542 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 10 7 Digital line card – ju mper block and sw itch locations 553-6161[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Li ne cards Page 543 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 10 8 Digital line card – ju mper block and sw itch locations 553-6161[...]

Page 544 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 545 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 546 NT8D03 Analog Line card Overview The NT8D03 Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-ty pe) telephones. It is equipped with an 8051-family microprocessor that performs the followin g functions: • control of card operation • card identification •s e l f -[...]

Page 546 of 906 NT8D03 Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 547 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 564 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 548 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: A maximum of four NT8D09 An alog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S and four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiti ng Line cards per MG 1000S Expansion are support ed. Cards later than v intage NT8D09AK support µ -Law and A-Law compandin g, and provide [...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Wa iting Line card Page 549 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (1 2.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card circuits connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connect or. The backplane is cabled[...]

Page 550 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 10 9 Analog message waiting line card – faceplate 553-6165 Anlg M/WL C NT8D09 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch LED[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Wa iting Line card Page 551 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The NT8D09 Analog Message Waitin g Line card also provides: • 600 ohms balanced termin ating impedance • analog-to-digital and digit al-to-analog conversi on of transmission and reception signals for 16 audio phone lines • transmission and recep[...]

Page 552 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 11 0 Analog message waiting line card – block diagram Input/ output interface control Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Line interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame syn[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Wa iting Line card Page 553 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The analog message waitin g line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data ove r the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in “Intelligent Periph eral Equipment” on page 32 . Line interface[...]

Page 554 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card control functions Control fun ctions are provided by the fol lowing: • a microcontro ller • a card LAN interface • signaling an d control circuit s on the analog message w aiting line card Microcontroller The analog message waitin g line card c[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Wa iting Line card Page 555 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Analog line interface Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of: • 20 dB for 200-500 Hz • 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to -line connection, the total inser tion loss at 1 kHz is 6 dB [...]

Page 556 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 179 prov ides a technical summary of the analog me ssage waiting line card. Ta b l e 1 7 9 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card technical summary Impedance 600 ohms Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -4 8 V (e xcludi ng set) Leakage[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Wa iting Line card Page 557 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements Table 180 provi des the power requireme nts for the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card. Foreign and surge voltage protections In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the NT8D09 Analog Me[...]

Page 558 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Overload level Signal levels exceed ing +7 dBm applied to th e tip and ring cause distortion i n speech transmission. Environmental specifications Table 181 lists t he environmenta l sp ecifications for the analog message waiting line card. Connector pin [...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Wa iting Line card Page 559 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Installati on and Configuration (553-302 1-210) for cable pinout information at the I/O panel. T able 18 2 Analog me ssage wa iting li ne card – backplane pinouts Bac kplane pinout* Lead designat ions Backplane pinout* Lead design ations 12A Line 0,[...]

Page 560 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 11 1 Analog messag e waiti ng line card – typical cross connection example 553-AAA1131 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT8D09 Message Waiting Line Card 0T 0R 1T 1R 26 1 27 2 System Cross-connect OPS or ONS telephone connections with message waiting lamp[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Wa iting Line card Page 561 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration This section outlines the p r ocedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize th e card. Figure 112 on p age 563 shows where the s[...]

Page 562 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 the system for port -to-port loss . See Software Input /Output: Administrat ion (553-3001-311) for LD 97 serv ice change instruction s. T able 18 3 T ransmission Profile Changes Vintage A/D con ver tor gain D/A con ver tor gain Pre vio us to AK –3.5 dB [...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Wa iting Line card Page 563 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 11 2 Analog message wait ing line car d – jumper block an d switch locations 553-6166[...]

Page 564 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 565 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 626 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 566 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interf aces eight analog trunk lines to the system. Each trunk interface is independe ntly configured by softw are control using the Trunk Administ ration program LD 14. You can install this card in any IPE slot. Note: Each MG 1000 S c[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 567 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 184 lists the signaling and trunk typ es supported by the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Physical description The trunk and common mu ltiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D14 Universal Tr[...]

Page 568 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 113 on page 569 . When an NT8D 14 Univ ersal Trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seco nds while the self -test runs. If the self-test is successful, the L[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 569 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 11 3 Universal trunk card – face plate S Univ Trk NT8D14 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6195[...]

Page 570 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description Figure 114 shows a block diagram of the major functions co ntained on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Each of these fu nctions is described on the following p ages. Figure 11 4 NT8D1 4 Universa l trunk car d – block diag ram Input/ output in[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 571 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card pa sses voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN li nk. These interfaces are described in “Intel ligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 32 . Trunk interface units The NT8D[...]

Page 572 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and cont rol circuits on the NT8D14 Universal Trun k card. Microcontroller The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contai ns a microcontroller that controls the in[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 573 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and take down call connections. Signaling interface All trunk signaling messages are th ree bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS -30X in A10 format. Configurati[...]

Page 574 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the system in the form of lo op (interrupting ) dial pulses or DTMF tones. Polarity- sensitive /-insensiti ve packs feat ure The CS 1000 Release 4.5 software provides the po larity[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 575 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 11 6 Loop start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Idle B goes on hook A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end Meridian 1 B Far end CO High-resistance loop High-resistance loop High- resistan[...]

Page 576 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 For trunks not equip ped with answer supe rvision, the PIP class of service is enabled and call-duration recording begi ns immediately upon near-end t runk seizure. The PSP and PIP classes of service are enable d in the Trunk Administration p rogram LD 14. Figure 11 [...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 577 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 11 8 Ground start call connection seque nce – inco ming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Call presented to console loop key Console answers B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end Meridian 1 B Far end CO T[...]

Page 578 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ground star t operation Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented throu gh software download m essages. In the idle st ate, the tip conducto r from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead. Incoming call[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 579 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation A trunk identified as possibly reverse-wired is switch ed by the software to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place on a call-by-call basis. Thus, if a previo usly correctly wired trunk becom es reverse-wired, the next incoming ca[...]

Page 580 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 12 0 Ground start call connection seque nce – inco ming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Call presented to console loop key Console answers B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO Tip open/[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 581 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wi red, the first subsequent call clears the threshold counter and no rmal gro und start processing is im plemented. Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer. Note 2: The near-end pr[...]

Page 582 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 12 1 Ground start call states – outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS System (near) end High-resistance loop Ground on ring Forced near end disconnect Loop pulsing or DTMF Forced far end disconnect Near end originates Dial tone CO toll denial Idle Near end disconnects[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 583 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 12 2 Ground start call connection seque nce – outg oing call to CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle B rings Trunk seizure Dial tone from CO B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO Tip open/ battery on ring Tip op[...]

Page 584 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Direct inward dial operation Incoming calls An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 123 on page 58 5 and Figure 124 on page 586 . Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the called par[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 585 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 12 3 DID trunk, loop DR ca ll stat es – incoming call from CO Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulsing or DTMF (Note) Note: The near end may be configured for immediate start, delay dial, or wink start. Forced far end disconnect Forced near end [...]

Page 586 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 12 4 DID trunk, loop DR ca ll connection sequence – incomi ng ca ll from CO A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO High- resistance loop Address signaling Hi[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 587 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 12 5 Two-way, loop DR, TIE tr unk call states – incoming call from far-end PBX Battery-ground or loop pulse, or DTMF Far end originates Idle Far end hangs up (Note) Far end disconnects first Far end disconnects first Far end disconnects Near end disconne[...]

Page 588 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 12 6 Two-way, loop DR, TI E trunk call conn ection sequence – inco ming call from far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end System Address signaling Hi[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 589 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outgoing calls In an outgo ing call confi guration, th e NT8D14 U niversal Trunk card is connected to an existing PBX b y a tie trunk. See Figure 127 o n page 590 and Figure 128 on page 591 . An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing[...]

Page 590 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 12 7 Two-way, loop DR, TIE tr unk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Far end PBX High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulse or DTMF [...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 591 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 12 8 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection se quence – outg oing call to far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing B rings A goes on hook Idle B goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX Address signaling High[...]

Page 592 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 12 9 Two-way, loop DR, TIE tr unk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Far end PBX High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulse or DTMF [...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 593 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 13 0 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection se quence – outg oing call to far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing B rings A goes on hook Idle B goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX Address signaling High[...]

Page 594 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Senderized operation for DI D and two-way loop DR trunks Incoming calls If the far-end is senderized, the near -end can operate in any mode: Immediate Start (I MM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wi nk (WNK) start, as assigned at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Admini st ration pr[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 595 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 13 1 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk ca ll states – incoming call th rough senderi zed, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF (Note 1) Far en[...]

Page 596 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 13 2 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk ca ll states – incoming call th rough senderi zed, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF (Note 1) Far end or[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 597 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near-end at expiratio n of end-of-dial timer . Where no far-end answer super vision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-en d call termination. Outgoing automatic, i ncoming dial oper[...]

Page 598 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 13 3 Two-way, lo op DR, TIE tru nk call states – outgoing call thro ugh far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS System (near) end Far end High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or lo[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 599 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 13 4 Two-way, loop O AID, TIE trunk call st ates – incoming call from far-end PBX System (near) end Low-resistance loop High-resistance loop Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF Far end Far end disconnect Forced near end disconnects [...]

Page 600 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 13 5 Two-way, loop O AID, TIE trunk ca ll connection sequence – inco ming call from far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX High- resistance loop[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 601 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 13 6 Two-way, loop O AID, TIE trunk call states – ou tgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Near end originates Far end disconnect Near end disconnect Idle Near end disconnects first Far end answers 553-AAA1147 Far end disconnects first Ground on t[...]

Page 602 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 13 7 Two-way, loop OA ID, TIE trun k call connection sequence – ou tgoing call to far-end PBX A State Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX High- resistance loop Low-resistance loop High-resistance loop High-resistance loop Ground on tip/ ba[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 603 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Recorded announcement trunk operation Note: Refer to “Multi-Chan nel RAN modes” on page 605 for information on Multi -Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk[...]

Page 604 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 13 8 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT 8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8 D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8 D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (W-BL) Announcer 0R 1 (BL-W) [...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 605 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation RAN modes of operation Figure 1 39 on page 606 shows the relat ionship of control signals to message playback for the operat ing modes availab le in announcement machin es. The signal names shown in Figure 139 are typical. Note 1: For continuous operation mode, c[...]

Page 606 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in Multi-Channel Lev el Start/Control mode, using the f ollowing response: RTYP = MLSS Figure 13 9 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) — Continuous operation mode — C ST+ input to announcer hardwire[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 607 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk members are provisioned in the Trunk Data Block LD 14. Refer to “Programming RAN trunks” on page 60 8 and to Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for instructio ns on service change programs. Continuous operation mode In the continuous [...]

Page 608 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Call routing to RAN trunks CS 1000 Release 4.5 software cont rols recorded announcement machines. These programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the type of intercept treatment required (for example, overfl ow, attendant, announcement), queue the interc[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 609 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Electrical specifications Table 185 gives the electrical characteris tics of the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. T able 18 5 Universal trunk card – trunk interface electrical characteristic s (P art 1 of 2) T runk T ypes Characteristic CO / FX / W A TS DID / TIE R[...]

Page 610 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements Power to the NT8D 14 Universal Trunk car d is provided by th e module power supply (ac or dc). Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-grou nd N/A N/A A C induction rejec[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 611 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Foreign and surge voltage protection The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card m eet s UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements. Environmental specifications Table 187 lists t he environmental specifications for t he NT8D14 Un[...]

Page 612 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • Transmission Compensated — used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk faci lity with a lo ss of greater than 2 dB for wh ich impedance co mpensatio[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 613 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follow s: T able 18 8 Inser tion Loss fr om IPE P or ts to IPE P or ts (measured in dB) IPE P or ts IPE P or ts 500/2500 Line Digital Line 2/4 Wire E&M T runk 4 Wire (ESN) E&M Tr u n k CO/FX /W A TS Loo[...]

Page 614 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connector pin assignments The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to th e backplane through a 160-pin connector sh roud. Telephone trun ks connect to t he universal trunk card at the back of the MG 1000S using a 25-pin connector. A list of the conne[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 615 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance and balance network configurat ion is se lected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card. NT8D14 has a reduced ju[...]

Page 616 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 1 9 0 J umper stra p settings – fa ctory standar d (NT8D14B A, NT8D14BB) T r unk types Loop length Ju mper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/W A TS 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 2-wa y TIE (LDR) 2-wa y TIE (OAID) DID 0?[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 617 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 19 1 J umper str ap settings – e xtended ra nge (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) T r unk types Loop length Ju mper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/W A TS > 1524 m (5 000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 2–3 2-wa y TIE (LDR) 2-wa y TIE (OA[...]

Page 618 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Jumper strap settings For most appli cations, the jumper st rap settings remain set to the standard configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 190 on page 616 . The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 191 on page 617 , for th e followin[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 619 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms • RAN trunks operating in pulse start or level start mod es Figure 140 on page 620 shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card (vintage BA ). Service change entries The trunk type, terminating im ped[...]

Page 620 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 14 0 Universal trunk card – jumper loca tions (for NT8D14BA, NT8 D14BB Release 9 and below) J1.4 J2.4 3 1 J4.4 3 1 J3.4 J1.5 J2.5 31 J3.4 31 J4.5 J1.1 J2.1 31 J3.1 31 J4.1 J1.6 J2.6 13 J4.6 13 J3.6 J1.7 J2.7 13 J4.7 13 J3.7 J1.3 J2.3 3 1 J4.3 Unit 3 Unit 1 U[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 621 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 19 3 T run k types – terminatio n impedance an d balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) T runk types T erminating impedance (Note 1) Balance network fo r loop lengths (Note 2) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft)[...]

Page 622 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Port-to-port loss configurat ion Loss parameters are selected on th e NT8D14 Universal Trunk card by a switchable pad controlled by codec emul ation software. For convenience, the pads settings are called “in” and “out.” Pad setti ngs are determined by the tw[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 623 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are ass igned as follows: • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL tru nk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedan ce compensation is provided, or[...]

Page 624 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Paging trunk operation A universal trunk card unit can be confi gured as a paging trunk. Configure units as paging tru[...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card Page 625 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 14 1 Connecting pagi ng equipment to the N T8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8 D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (w-bl) 0R 1 (bl-w) 0A [...]

Page 626 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 627 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 666 NT8D15 E & M Trunk card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 628 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: In Cabinet systems equipped with Meridian M ail, the Universal Trunk line card cannot be installed in slot 10 of the main cabinet. The NT8D15 E&M trunk card supports the following types of tru nks: • 2-wire E&M Type I signaling trunk s • two-wire dial[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 629 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The line interface and co mmon multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit bo ard. The E&M trunk card connects to the backplane throu gh a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment conn[...]

Page 630 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 14 2 E&M trunk car d – faceplate S E & M Dict Trk NT8D15 Rlse 05 Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6199[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 631 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by servic e change entries. Figure 143 on page 632 show[...]

Page 632 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Softwar e control of A/µ-Law mode. • Software control of digit collection. Figure 14 3 E&M trunk car d – block diag ram Input/ output interface control Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN in[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 633 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The E&M trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X l oops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. The E&M trunk card contains four identical and independently configurab le trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits)[...]

Page 634 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Trunk circuit features Trunk unit func tions The functions provided by each unit on the E&M trunk car d include 2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operatio n as follows: • 2-wire, E&M Type I signaling (see Figure 144 on page 63 5 ) with: — near-[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 635 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 14 4 E&M Type I signaling E E&M trunk card External signaling circuit M E M 553-6258 Ð 48V Ð 48V[...]

Page 636 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 14 5 E&M Type II signaling Ð 48V SG E M SB Ð 48V SG E P P M SB 553-6259 Note: M, SB, E, and SG designations are Electronic Industries Association and Telecommunications Industries Association (EIA/TIA) conventions. These leads are also known as MB, MA, EA,[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 637 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 14 6 4-wire DX signaling Tip B T1 J3 J5 T2 (Note 2) Ring B a b Tip A Ring A a b Distant circuit electromechanical (may also be Succession 1000M, Succession 1000, or Meridian 1) Local system circuit Ð 48V Ð 48V 4 8 553-AAA1151 1100 Ω (Note 1) K1 R C R eq 1[...]

Page 638 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 14 7 Paging trunk operati on Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 3 NT8 D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (W-BL) 0R 1 (BL-W) 0A 27 (W-O) 0PG 2 (O-W) Module I/O Panel Connector Part of 25-[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 639 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card control functions Control funct ions are provid ed by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E& M trunk card. Microcontroller The E&M trunk card contains a microcon troller that controls the int ernal operation of the c[...]

Page 640 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Signaling interface All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes lo ng. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format. Configuration information for the E & M trunk is dow nloaded from the CPU at power up and by command from mainte[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 641 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • monitor signals from the trunk in terface and generate a message when required for each state change • control disabling and enablin g of unit or card • control A-Law and µ-Law operation modes • control transm ission pad set tings Maintenance features The[...]

Page 642 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Idle state For E&M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground and the E lead is an open circuit. Outgoing calls are processed as follows: • The M lead changes from ground to battery . — If answer supervision is prov ided by the far end, there is a change[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 643 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 14 9 E&M Type I signaling pattern s – originating party release Near end M lead Near end E lead Idle Near end disc first Near end disc Dialing Near end seizes Far end answers (ans sup) Far end answers (no ans sup) 553-6263 Far end disc Far end disc firs[...]

Page 644 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 15 0 E&M Type I signaling pattern s – originating party rele ase on a tandem connection Near end M lead Near end E lead Near end stores office DN Dial CO/FX/WATS and office D CO/FX/WATS end disc first (ground start only)(ans sup) Pseudo-answer supervision [...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 645 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming calls The far-end initiates calls as follows: • The ground is placed on the E lead in E&M signaling. • Dial pulses are subsequently appl ied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead. • If the far-end is equippe d for sending, the syst em can [...]

Page 646 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 for a tandem connection where the originat ing end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (CCSA not applicable). Type II signaling uses four leads: M, SB, E, and SG. Instea d of changes of state between battery and gro und (M signals) or open and ground (E sign[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 647 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 15 1 E&M Type II si gnaling pat terns – orig inating part y release Near end M/SB leads Near end EA/EB leads Idle Near end disc first System end disc Dialing Near end seizes Far end answers (ans sup) Far end answers (no ans sup) 553-AAA1153 Far end disc[...]

Page 648 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 15 2 E&M Type II signalin g patterns – origi nating pa rty release on a tand em connecti on Near end M/SB leads Near end EA/EB leads Near end stores office DN Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN CO/FX/WATS end disc first (ground start only)(COS-ans sup) Pseudo-a[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 649 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 198 and Table 199 show call-connection and tak e-down sequencing fo r DX signaling. Table 200 on page 650 and Tab le 201 on page 651 show sequencing where the E&M trunk card is used in a tandem PBX. T able 19 8 DX signaling – outgoing calls with originat[...]

Page 650 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 F ar-end on hook first Current flo w Hig h Network taken down and trunk i dled No current flow High Near-end on hook first, networ k taken do wn Current flow Low F ar-end on hook, tru nk idled No current flo w High Ta b l e 2 0 0 DX signal ing – outgoing calls with o[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 651 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Near end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low F ar end on h ook, trunk i dled No current flow High T able 20 1 DX signaling – incoming calls with originati ng party rele ase on tandem connections (P ar t 1 of 2) Condition Current in signaling lead St[...]

Page 652 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: * – CO ground start: the trunk is idled and th e network taken down, but the incoming ti e trunk is controlled by the originating end. Electrical specifications Table 202 lists the electri cal characteristics of th e trunk interface on the E&M trunk card. I[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 653 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Eff ectiv e loss See pad table (T able 209 on page 662 ) See pad table (T able 209 on page 662 ) T er minating impedance 600 ohms 600 ohms Balance impedance N/A 600 ohms T able 20 3 Electrical characteristics of trunk car d s Characteristic DID T runk CO trunk Nomin[...]

Page 654 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements Table 204 lists the power requirement s for the E&M trunk card. Environmental specifications Table 205 provides the environmental specificati ons for the E&M trunk card. Foreign and surge voltage protection The E&M trunk card meets CS03 o[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 655 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Connector pin assignments The E&M trunk card brings t he four analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connecto r shroud.The backplan e is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by [...]

Page 656 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 0 7 E&M trunk card – backplane pino uts for 4-wire mode s Tr u n k Number 4-wire T ype I Mode 4-w ire T ype II Mode Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 0 12B TA 12A TB 12B TA 12A TB 13B RA 13A RB 13B RA 13A RB 14B E 14A M 14B EA 14A EB 15B ECG [...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 657 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 15 3 E&M trunk card – typical cross connection example 553-AAA1155 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 3 26 1 27 2 System Cross connect E & M trunk connections A MDF TipA TipB RingA RingB E M ECG ESCG Tip Ring E M 28 3 29 [...]

Page 658 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuration Each of the four trunk circuits on th e E&M trunk card can be individuall y configured for trunk type, compandin g mode, and port-to -port loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both ju mper changes and configuration software service entries[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 659 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 15 4 E&M trunk car d – jumper loca tions 553-6200[...]

Page 660 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 0 8 E&M trunk car d – jumper strap se ttings Jum pe r (Note 1) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk Ty p e I Paging Ty p e I T ype II DX tip & ring pair M—rcv E—xmt E—r cv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 661 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service entries The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in Route Data Block, Automatic Tru nk Maintenance (LD 16). The companding mode is selected by making service change entries in Trunk Data Block (LD 14 ). Refer to Table 208 on page [...]

Page 662 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facilit y with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which i mpedance compensation i s provided, or for a[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 663 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 15 5 Pad orientation Analog 553-AAA1156 System XMT Analog REC REC Port B E&M XMT Digital[...]

Page 664 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The optional applications, features and signaling ar rangements for each trunk are assigned through un ique route and trunk data blocks. Refer to th e Features and Services (553-3001-306) for information ab out assigning features and services to trunks. PA[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 665 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 210 shows t he insertion loss from IPE port to IPE port. Paging trunk operation When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-p rovided paging amplifier system (not zone sel ectable). When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant-key op[...]

Page 666 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 15 6 Paging trunk operati on Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8 D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (w-bl) 0R 1 (bl-w) 0A 27 (w-o) 0PG 2 (o-w) Module I/O Panel Connector Part of 2[...]

Page 667 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 680 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 668 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • NT6D39 CPU/Network mod ule • NT9D11 Core/Netw ork module The SDI paddle board is comp atible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system opt ions listed above. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface. Physica[...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 669 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 15 7 NT8D41AA SD I paddle board Option switches LED Enable/disable switch Port 1 connector (RS-232C) Option switches Port 2 connector (RS-232C) Option switches Backplane mating connectors 553-5979[...]

Page 670 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O pane l in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the system to a t[...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 671 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work o nly when that CPU is active. The SDI paddle board is normally in stalled into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system process[...]

Page 672 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring the SDI paddle board Configuring the SDI pad dle board consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: • Port addr ess • Baud rate • DTE/DCE/Fiber mode The SDI paddle board has seven option switches, SW 2–8. Figure [...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 673 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Option switch settings Address Address select switch SW4 and logi c on the card a lways address the two UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 throu gh 15 and 16. The settings for this switch are shown in Tabl e 212. Baud rate Switches S[...]

Page 674 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be co nfigured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions for setting the swit ches SW5, SW6, SW7, and SW8 are sh own in Table 214 on page [...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 675 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 21 4 NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings Mode P or t 1 – SW5 Po r t 1 – S W 6 123456123456 DTE (termi nal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on off [...]

Page 676 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 15 9 SDI paddle board op tion switch locations 553-5988 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 56 DS1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW1 J1 J2 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 Address selection P or t 1 DTE/DCE mode selection [...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 677 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to reco gnize it. This is done using th e Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructi ons for running the Confi[...]

Page 678 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communicat ion devices, printers, and peri pherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be co nnected to either of the card’s two serial ports.[...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 679 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 16 0 SDI paddle board cabling Module front NT8D46 cable to connector J2 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2) NT8D93 cable (Note 1) To external equipment Backplane J1 J2 NT8D84 cable N T 8 D 4 1 J1 System moni[...]

Page 680 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 681 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 694 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 682 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • NT6D39 CPU/Network mod ule • NT9D11 Core/Netw ork module The QSDI paddle board is compatible w ith all existi ng system software, bu t can only be used with the system options l isted above. It does not suppo rt the 110 baud rate or the 20 [...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Pa ddle Board Page 683 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 16 1 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board 1 234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 56 1234 O N ^ 56 1 2 34 O N ^ 56 1234 O N ^ 56 Address selection f or por ts 1 and 2 (See T ab le 6) P or t 1 DTE/DCE mode selection (See T able 7) P or t 4 D[...]

Page 684 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Other lo gic on the car d includes baud rat e generator s, RS-232-C driver/ receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to co nfigure each UART. System considerations In dual-processor syst ems, the QSDI paddle board will behave differently[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Pa ddle Board Page 685 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The QSDI paddle board is normally inst alled into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at m[...]

Page 686 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 8 CTS Clear to send (N ote 1) Cl ear to send Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD , DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the por t on the QSDI paddle board is alwa ys ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to [...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Pa ddle Board Page 687 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuring the QSDI paddle board Configuring th e QSDI paddle board to wo rk in a system consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: •B a u d r a t e • Port addr ess • DTE/DCE mode The QSDI paddle board has fourteen[...]

Page 688 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 * F or future use. Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and lo gic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 a nd 3 through 14 and 1 5. The settin gs for both switches are show n in Table 217. To avoid sy stem problem[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Pa ddle Board Page 689 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 161 on page 683 displays SW15 and SW16. * T o enable por ts 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON . T o enable por ts 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + F or each X, the setting f or th[...]

Page 690 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be co nfigured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions for settin g the switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, and SW9 are sho[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Pa ddle Board Page 691 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be c onfigured to recognize it, using the Configuration Record program LD 1 7. Instructions for running this program [...]

Page 692 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Inte rface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of comm unication devices, printers, and peri pherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s two ser[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Pa ddle Board Page 693 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 16 3 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling Module front NT8D46 cable to connector J4 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2) NT8D93 cable (Note 1) To external equipment Backplane J1 J2 NT8D84 cable N T 8 D 4 [...]

Page 694 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 695 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 700 NTAG26 XMFR card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 MF signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 696 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 219 lists the frequency va lues used for received signals. Ta b l e 2 1 9 MF frequency v alues Digit Bac kwar d direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 1 700 Hz + 900 Hz 2 700 HZ + 1 100 Hz 3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz 4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz 8[...]

NTAG26 XMFR card Page 697 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation XMFR receiver specifications Table 220 provides the operating requir ements for the NT AG26 circuit card. T able 22 0 XMFR receiver specifications (P ar t 1 of 3) Coding: Mu-La w Input sensitivi ty: must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO must reject: -35 to dBmO Frequency sensitivity: m[...]

Page 698 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Noise Rejection: Error Rate in White Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls T est: 10 digit ca lls nominal freque ncy @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -20 dB all digi ts Immunity to Im pulse Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls T est: 10 digit ca lls nomina[...]

NTAG26 XMFR card Page 699 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The XMFR receiver specifications conform to the following: • TR-NPL-000258, Compatib ility Information for F.G.D. switched access service, Bell Communica tion Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0, October 1985. • TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BO C Intra-LATA Networks, B[...]

Page 700 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Physical specifications The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are shown in Tab le 221. Ta b l e 2 2 1 Ph ysical specifications Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) F aceplate LED Lit when the cir[...]

Page 701 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 708 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 702 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ports 1 and 3 are config ured as DCH. Ports 0 and 2 are configured as SDI (not supp orted). See Table 2 22. Each pair is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 223. Note: Digital Privat e Network Signali ng System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in the U.K. T able 22 2[...]

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Pag e 703 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE confi guration. This option is selected from a jumper on the card. Ta ble 224 shows the jumper settings. T able 22 4 J umper settings Po r t Jum pe r location Strap fo r DTE Strap for DCE Jum pe r location RS422 RS232 0 J10 C - B B [...]

Page 704 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connecting to the ports External devices are connected to the SDI/DCH card by the following: • the NTAK19FB four-port SDI cable. Th is cable does not have to be terminated at the cross connect te rminal since it is equipped with connectors. • the NE-A25-B cable. Terminat[...]

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Pag e 705 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 22 6 NT AK02 conne ctions at the cro ss-connect terminal – P or t 1 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Design ations I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pa i r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 5T 5R W- S S-W SCTEA — SCT A — O — I — O — I ?[...]

Page 706 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 2 7 NT AK02 co nnections at the cro ss-connect terminal – P or t 2 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Design ations I=Input O=Output Signal Pa i r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 13T 13R BK-G G-BK — — — — — O — I — DTR —[...]

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Pag e 707 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 22 8 NT AK02 conne ctions at the cro ss-connect terminal – P or t 3 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Design ations I=Input O=Output Signal Pa i r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 17T 17R Y- O O-Y SCTEA — SCT A — O — I — O — I[...]

Page 708 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Characteristics of the low speed port Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to and from the line one bit at a time . The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows: • Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 480 0; 9600; 19,2 00 Default = 12[...]

Page 709 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 720 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 710 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Physical description The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock contro ller and D-channel daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and con nectors. See Figure 164 on page 710 . The NT[...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb D TI/PRI card Page 711 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The first five LEDs operate as follow s: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self- test is in progress, th e LEDs flash three times and then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 229. T able 22 9 NT AK09 LED states LED State Def[...]

Page 712 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTAK09 DTI/PRI power on self-test When power is applied to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card, the card performs a self-test. The LEDs direct ly assoc iated with the NTAK09 circuit card are DIS, ACT, RED, YEL, and LBK. The clock controller LED is also included in the pow[...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb D TI/PRI card Page 713 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTAK93 self-test The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard d oes not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When power is applied, it turns red and remain steadily lit, [...]

Page 714 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to sa fety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltag e protection in an internal enviro nment. Functional description NTAK09 provides th e following features and functions: • configurable parameters, including A-Law and [...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb D TI/PRI card Page 715 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Architecture Signaling interface The signaling interface perfor ms an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of transmission are three bytes long. Interconnection The interconnection to the carr[...]

Page 716 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Digital pad The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data -output transfer function meets the character istics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A -Law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to[...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb D TI/PRI card Page 717 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation D-channel interface The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maxi mum, full-duplex, se rial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock out put, and transmit clock output. The receive and tran[...]

Page 718 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settin gs are shown in Table 232. Receiver The receiver extracts data and clock fr om an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case D[...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb D TI/PRI card Page 719 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Clock controller interface The clock controller interf ace provides the recovered clock from the external digital facility to the clock cont roller daughterboard throu gh the backplane. Depending on the equipped state of the clock controller, th e clock controller[...]

Page 720 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 721 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 734 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 722 of 906 NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI ca rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Physical description The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", mult i-layer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8” wide and contains six LEDs. The LEDs operate as follows: • After the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the pow[...]

NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI card Page 723 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplan e. It draws less than 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V. Environment The NTAK10 card meets all applicable Nortel operating specifi cations. Functional description The NTAK10 provides the[...]

Page 724 of 906 NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI ca rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • per-channel and all-channel loopback capab ilities for near-end and far-end •s e l f - t e s t • download o f incoming ABCD validation t imes from sof tware • warm SYSLOAD (TS1 6 AS16 transmitted) Applicability to France Features specific to DTI requiremen ts [...]

NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI card Page 725 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Transmit data To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream fr om the NTAK02 circuit card is convert ed to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits are extracted by the si gnaling interface circuitry. Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to th[...]

Page 726 of 906 NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI ca rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • controlling LEDs • downloading Local Calling Areas (LCAs) • monitoring errors and ala rms • detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data • counting bipo lar violations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors, and CRC-4 errors • monitori[...]

NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI card Page 727 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation If a coaxial interface is requir ed, use NT5K85 in conjunction with th e NTBK05. Channel associate d signaling Channel associated signa ling means that each traffi c carrying channel has its own signaling channel permanently associated with it . Timeslot 16 is used to[...]

Page 728 of 906 NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI ca rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 With the exception of the outpulsi ng si gnals and special signals, such as Denmark's Flash signal and Sweden's Parking signal, the minimum durati on of any signal state is 100 ms. Som e signal states can have a minim um duration time that is longer than 100 m[...]

NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI card Page 729 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation converte d from di gital to AMI and sen t to the carrier. A transformer provides isolation and impedance matchin g (75 ohms or 1 20 ohms). Rx Direction The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the in put selector as well as the output selector fo[...]

Page 730 of 906 NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI ca rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Tracking mo de There are two stages to clock controller tracking: • tracking a reference, and • locked onto a reference. When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to mat ch its frequency to the frequency of the inco ming clock. When the frequ[...]

NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI card Page 731 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Clock controller funct ions and features The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include: • phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distri buting it t o the CPU t hrough t he backplane. Up to two references at a ti[...]

Page 732 of 906 NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI ca rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, then th e clock controller tr acks to the primary. If the software command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference[...]

NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI card Page 733 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Reference c lock interf ace The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF connector. The signals at these c onnectors conform to the electrical characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standa rd. Switch settings Various 2MB DTI switch option s exist o[...]

Page 734 of 906 NTAK10 2. 0 Mb DTI ca rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 735 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 744 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 736 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: The card is restricted to slot s 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinet s (such as NAK11Dx an d NTAK11Fx cabin ets). It will not work in sl ots 4 through 10 in these cabinets. The NTAK20 clock controller card can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock re[...]

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterbo ard Page 737 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • jitter filt ering • use of an algorithm to detect crys tal aging and qualify clocking information Clocking modes The clock controller can operate in one of two mo des: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run). Tracking mo de In tracking m[...]

Page 738 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Free-run ( non-track ing) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchro nize on any outside source. Instead, it provides its ow n inte rnal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the system acts as a master clock source for other systems [...]

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterbo ard Page 739 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The main function al blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include: • phase difference detector circuit • digital Phase Locked Loop (PLL) • clock detectio n circuit • digital-to-anal og converter • CPU MUX bus interface • [...]

Page 740 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 System clo ck specif ication a nd characte ristics Since the accuracy requirements for CC ITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of frequency tuning sensitivity. See Table 238. EIA/CCITT compl[...]

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterbo ard Page 741 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation without software i ntervention. If both re ferences are out of specification, the clock controller provid es holdover. Autorecovery an d chatter If the command “track to primary” is gi ven, the clock contro ller tracks to the primary reference and c[...]

Page 742 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Holdover and free-run In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming re ference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is ini tiated when the clock co[...]

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterbo ard Page 743 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation backplane line. It designates the DTI/PR I motherboard as a primary reference source. The secondary reference is ob tained from another DTI/PRI card, which is desi gnated by a technici an. No other clock sources are used. External timing interface The c[...]

Page 744 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 745 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 762 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 746 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs) if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. Physical description The NTAK79 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer print ed[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 747 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation RED On (Red) A red alar m state has b een detected. This represen ts a local alar m state of: Loss of Carrier (LOS) Loss of F rame (LF AS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. YEL On (Y ellow) A y ellow alar m state has been detected. This repre[...]

Page 748 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTAK79 switches The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-bo ard dip switches. The tables that follow provide in formation on the various set tings and related fun ctions of these switches. Note: The ON posi tion for all the swit ches is towards the bottom of the card. This is[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 749 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 16 5 NTAK79 card with sw itch locations 12 12 12 12 553-7869.EPS LEDs Jack Faceplate Switch 1 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 2 NTAK79[...]

Page 750 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Switch SW1 – DCHI Configura tion This switch enables/di sables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is not su pported at thi s time. For all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode. Switch SW2 – Carri er Impedance Co nfi[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 751 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Switch SW4 – Carrier Shield Grounding This switch enables for the selective gr ounding of the Tx / Rx pairs of the carrier cable. Closing the swi tch (down positio n) applies Frame Ground (FGND) to the coaxial car rier cable shield, creat ing a 75 ohms unbal anced co[...]

Page 752 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI • transmission of remote alarm when instructed • slip-buffering receive messages • supporting Nation al and Internationa l bits in time slot 0 • on-board clock controller • onboard D-chan nel i[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 753 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The incoming serial bit st ream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control . The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots[...]

Page 754 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Signaling interface The signaling interface consis ts of the A07 DS-30X si gnaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-3 0X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length. Carrier interface The E1 interface connection t[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 755 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Impedance matching The line interface provides fo r the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cab le. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in Table 245. Note: The ON posi tion for all the swit ches is towards the bottom of the card. This is [...]

Page 756 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 requirements of the CCITT recom mendation G.742. This provi des jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequen cy range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz. Transmitter func tions The transmitter tak es the binary (dual unip olar) data from the PCM transceiver and[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 757 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • receive clock output • transmit clock output The receive and transmit clocks have sl ightly different bi t rates from each other, as determined by the tr ansmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (D CHI). It is the e[...]

Page 758 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles th e functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link and the echo can celler/test port interface. The echo/test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of th e UART. The Card-LAN interface is a[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 759 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation If the incoming clock reference is stab le, th e internal clock controller w ill track it, lock onto it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however, environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to drift. When this happ ens, the inter[...]

Page 760 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • jitter filt ering • use of an algorithm to detect crystal agin g and to qualify clocking information Reference sw itchove r Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the refe rence degrades to a point where t[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 761 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation A time-out mechanism p rev ents chatter due to rep eated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources. Holdover and free -run In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming re ference [...]

Page 762 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 763 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 768 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 764 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler In terface daughte rboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 — system parameters are service changeable (sys tem parameters are downloaded from software) — incoming Layer 3 message valida tion procedures are implemented in the D-P ORT firmware — supported message unit s and inform ation elements ca[...]

NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Page 765 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Faceplate LEDs NTAK09 1.5 Mb PRI and NTBK50 2.0 MB PRI cards LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCHI LED is dual-color (red and gr een). The LEDs are described in Table 248. Power consumption Power consump ti[...]

Page 766 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler In terface daughte rboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DMA controller A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory and communication ports. The DMA cha nnels are only used in the receive direction (f rom line to SSC), not in the transm it direction. Random Access Memory (RAM)[...]

NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Page 767 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The port will operate at: The address of ports is se lected by hardwired back plane card address. Port characteristics and LA PD parameters are downloaded fro m software. D-Port — SDTI/PRI interface Below is a brief description of sign als. [...]

Page 768 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler In terface daughte rboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 769 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 772 NTBK22 MISP card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 770 of 906 NTBK22 MISP card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Refer to ISDN Basi c Rate Interface: In stallation and Configurati on (553-3001-218) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (553-3001-380) for additional informat ion. Functional description Each MISP can support 4 lin e cards (UILC or SILC or any combinatio n of the two). Eac[...]

NTBK22 MISP card Pag e 771 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) The HDLC is a format converter that supp orts up to 32 serial channels that communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps. Th e HDLC converts messages into the following two message fo rmats: • a serially tran smitted, zero-insert ed, CRC prot[...]

Page 772 of 906 NTBK22 MISP card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 773 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 784 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 774 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 i n the MG 10 00S. The card is no t supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different Central Of fices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The sli[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 775 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 16 6 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards NTAK20 Clock Controller NTAK93 or NTBK51 D-Channel Interface SW2 SW4 1 2 1 2 SW1 1 2 Stiffeners Connector Sockets LEDs Bantam Jacks Standoffs DIS ACT RED YEL LBK CC DCH RCV XMT On Off On Off On Off 553-7872 553-CSE[...]

Page 776 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The LEDs are described in Table 249. Ta b l e 2 4 9 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 1 of 2) LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disab led or out-of-ser vice. Also , the state of the ca rd after powe r-up , completion of self test, and exiti[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 777 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The NTBK50 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing up to 2 A on +5 V, 35 mA on +15 V and 20 mA o n –15 V. Environment The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel operating specifications. Functional description NTBK50 provides the followi ng featu[...]

Page 778 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI • transmission of remote alarm when instructed • slip-buffering receive messages • support of National and International bits in timeslot 0 • clock controller daughterboard • D-channel interfac[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 779 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation message format; eight are assig ned to voice/data (6 4 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 K bps). The incoming serial bit st ream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The si gnaling bits are extracted and[...]

Page 780 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Signaling interface The signaling interface consis ts of the A07 DS-30X si gnaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling li nk via the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length. Carrier interface For the E1 interface, the co nnec[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 781 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Impedance matching (Switch SW2) The line interface provides fo r the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in Table 251. Note: The ON position fo r all the switches is toward the bottom of the card. Thi[...]

Page 782 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Carrier Shield ground ing (Switch SW4) Table 253 lists the Carrier Shield ground switch settin gs. Note: The usual method is to ground th e outer conductor of the receive coax signal. Receiver func tions The receiver extracts data an d clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark In[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 783 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation CEPT transceiver The transmitter and receiver functions ar e used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functio ns m eet applicable specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732. The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.0[...]

Page 784 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a singl e port which directly interfaces to th e PRI motherboard. See Table 254. Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles th e functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link test port interfa[...]

Page 785 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 790 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 786 of 906 NTBK51 Downl oadable D-channel H andler daughterboa rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 — DCH interface — layer 3 preprocessor — traffic reporting including link capacity Physical description The NTBK51 daughterboard interfaces w ith the system CPU and is mounted on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2 Mb P[...]

NTBK51 Downloadabl e D-channel Handler dau ghterboard Page 787 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The main functional b locks of th e NTBK51 architecture include the following : • Microprocessors •M a i n m e m o r y • Shared memo ry • EPROM memor y • Flash EPROM memory •E E P R O M m e m o r y • S[...]

Page 788 of 906 NTBK51 Downl oadable D-channel H andler daughterboa rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Main memory The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mb yte of SRAM and is accessible in 8 or 16 bits. The software , base code and application reside in main RAM and is downloaded from the software thro ugh the shared m emory. Shar[...]

NTBK51 Downloadabl e D-channel Handler dau ghterboard Page 789 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Sanity timer A sanity timer is incorpo rated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU fro m getting tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. If the MPU encounters a hardware or softwa re fault and enters a continuous loop, the sanity [...]

Page 790 of 906 NTBK51 Downl oadable D-channel H andler daughterboa rd 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 download depends on th e result of the check made by the CPU on the MSDL base code and application software. If a forced download enable comm and is executed in LD 96, the MSD L base code and applicatio n are forced down to the DDCH card, e[...]

Page 791 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 810 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 792 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The cards are identified by a two-letter suffix to the product code called the vintage. The card vintage is based on whether PPM is equipped or not, and the individual countries where the card is being installed. The cards listed below are minimu m vint[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 793 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards have eight units. Each unit connect s to th e shelf backplane through an 80-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel which is then cab led to the cross-c[...]

Page 794 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • provide 4 dB dynamic attenuatio n pads on a per call basis • allow individual un its or the entire board to be disabled by software • provide software sel ectable A-law or µ-law compan ding • indicate self-test status during an automatic or m[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 795 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call place d by Central Offic e The Central Office initiates a cal l by applying ringing between the tip and rin g wires. If the call is answered, the ringing detector on the trunk card is switched out and a low resistance dc lo op is placed between [...]

Page 796 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Electrical specifications Power requirements Table 256 shows t he power requir ements for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. Note 1: Analog circuitry is powered wi th +/-12 V ge nerated fr om +/-15 V. The maximum current imbal[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 797 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Pad switching The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support the N orth American l oss plan . Software con figuration allow s the selection of 4 dB loss pads on a per unit basis. Note: The tolerance for the above nominal values [...]

Page 798 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 16 7 NTCK16 Central Office trunk co nnections for NT8D37 I/O pa nel connectors A, E, K, R Pi n s Pai r Col or I / O P a ne l C onne c t or Uni t Nu m be r AE KR 26 1 W-BL BL-W Unit 27 2 W-O O-W 0 28 3 W-G G-W Unit 29 4 W-BR BR-W 1 30 5 W-S S-W S [...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 799 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 16 8 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connector s B, F , L, S Pi n s Pa i r Co l o r I /O P a ne l C onne c t or U ni t Nu m b er B FLS 26 1 W-BL BL-W Unit 27 2 W-O O-W 0 28 3 W-G G-W Unit 29 4 W-BR BR-W 1 30 5 W-S [...]

Page 800 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 16 9 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connector s C, G, M, T Pi n s Pai r Co l or I/ O P a ne l C onne c t or Uni t Nu mb er CG M T 26 1 W-BL BL-W Unit 27 2 W-O O-W 4 28 3 W-G G-W S S S S Unit 29 4 W-BR BR-W L O L O L [...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 801 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown. LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16AX. Prompt R esponse Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: CO T D efine a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer [...]

Page 802 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Trunk Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX . (Part 1 of 2) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit TYPE: CO T Central Office T r unk TN T er minal Number l s c u F or mat f or [...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 803 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16AX card. PPID Freq Mi n pulse detection 03 16Kz>70ms 04 12Kz>70ms Country BTID Cadence Brazil, Tortola10250 ms +/- 50 ms o n/off Mexico10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexi[...]

Page 804 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTCK16BX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown: LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16B X. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit. TYPE: CO T Define a new Route Data Block. CUST xx Customer nu[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 805 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 1 of 2) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit. TYPE: CO T Central Office T r unk TN T er minal Number l s c u F or mat f [...]

Page 806 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note 1: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16BX card. (DIP) DTN Digitone signaling, (digipulse) (P10) P12 P2 0 Make-break ratio f or pulse dialing speed. LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 2 of 2) Prompt R[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 807 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation BTID values by country Country BTID Cadence Brazil Tortola10 250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 10 250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 8 375 ms on/o ff Singapore1 1 750 ms o n/off Ireland 3 500 +/- 50 ms on/off Ireland 9 375 - 750 ms on/off Kuwait, Chile 6500[...]

Page 808 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Detection limits Pulses detected by the NTCK 16AX circuit card must be within the followi ng limits: Busy tone detect Busy tone is sent by the Cen tral Office to indicate the release of an established call. Detection limits The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX gen[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 809 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Therefore the followi ng steps must be followed w hen the Generic XFCOT is installed: 1 Define Loss Switching mode. Resp ond to the prompts in LD 97 as shown. 2 Define Loss Switching Class Of Service. Respond to the pro mpts in LD 14 as shown. LD 97 [...]

Page 810 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Equivalencies The following equivalencies do apply : • XFCOT COT SHL is equivalent with XUT COT TRC • XFCOT COT LOL is equivalent with XUT COT NTC. The entries TRC and NTC will no longer be al lowed for the G eneric XFCOT. Trunk to Trunk connection [...]

Page 811 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 824 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 812 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The NTDK20GA SSC card has the follo wing components and features: • NTTK25 daughterboard Flash memory, NTAK 19 SIMM module (16 MB) DRAM, and Backup memory Note: The NTTK13 daughterb oard is still supported . • up to two 100BaseT IP daughterboards • two [...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 813 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 17 0 NTDK20 SSC card and expansion dau ghterboard in the Call Server Ports 1 & 3 for 100BaseT dau ghterboard Flash ROM Drive PCMCIA Drive Connector fo r 2nd 100BaseT daughterboard. MG 1000S systems 1 and 3 Ports 2 and 4 for Media Gateways 2 and [...]

Page 814 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Memory The majority of system and customer co nfi gured data is bot h controll ed and stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM. In the event of data loss, the NTDK 20 SSC card also r[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 815 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 100BaseT IP daughterboards A 100BaseT IP Daughterboard mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card enables the connection of the Call Server to a MG 1000S. See Figure 170 on page 813 . Each daughterboard increases the number of confer ence channels by 32. The maximum n[...]

Page 816 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 17 1 NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard Figure 17 2 NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 817 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If not connecting point -to-point , connect the Call Server and MG 1000S using a straight-throug h Ethernet UTP Cat 5 cable. Call Servers can be connected to MG 1000 S systems in the following ways: • Use 100BaseT to connect to the LAN for voice di[...]

Page 818 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 17 3 Call Server connection to Media Gateway 1000S systems For further informati on or installation instructions, refer to the Communication Server 10 00S: Install ation and Configurati on (553-3031-210). PC card interface The NTDK20 SSC card has a PC [...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 819 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Security device The NTDK20 SSC card in each MG 100 0S must contain a NTDK57DA Security device, a remote dongle (NT_ Rem) which is keyed to match the NTDK57AA Security device on the Call Server and a standard dongle (NT_STD). This maintains the requir ement[...]

Page 820 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 SDI ports The NTDK20 SSC card in both the Call Server and the MG 1000S systems contains three SDI ports us ed to connect on-sit e terminals or remot e terminals through a modem. Table 260 shows the po rt default settings. Conferencing Thirty-two conference ch[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 821 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The MG 1000S 10BaseT po rt can run in Normal mod e or Survival m ode. In Normal mode, the MG 1000S does not provide access to m aintenance or alarm management. External connections to the 10BaseT por t are provided by a 15-pin co nnector located on the bac[...]

Page 822 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 6 1 MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion slot assignments MG 1000S/MG 1000S Ex pansion Fir st Second Thir d Fourth Ph ysical card slot Logical car d slot Physical car d slot Logical car d slot Ph ysical card slot Logical card slot Physical card slot Log[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 823 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 17 4 MG 1000S slots Media Gateway 1000 553-AAA1991[...]

Page 824 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 17 5 MG 1000S Expansion slots 553-AAA1992 Media Gateway 1000 and Media Gateway 1000 Chassis Expansion[...]

Page 825 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 838 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 826 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 To provide CEMUX communicat ion with th e card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 i n the MG 10 00S. The card is no t supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Up to four digital trunks are suppo[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Pag e 827 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 17 6 NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller O O S AC T R ED YEL LBK C C D C H RCV XMT NTRB21 TMDI SW ON 1 2 3 4 DCH F/W LEN 0 LEN 1 Len 2 553-CSE9024 Stiffeners NTAK93/51 Clock Controller Mounting Holes Connector Socket Connector Pins LEDs Bantam Jacks St[...]

Page 828 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 In general, the first five LE Ds operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriat e states, as sh own in Table 262. Figure 177 on page 829 sho[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Pag e 829 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 1 77 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate 55 3-C SE0 007 OOS AC T RE D YEL LB K CC DC H TM DI Mo n i t o r Po r t RS 232 MA INT Rx Tx[...]

Page 830 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Foreign and surge voltage protection Lightning protectors must be installed be tween an external T1 carrier facility and the system. F or public T1 f acilities, this p rotection is prov ided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility en vironment (a ca[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Pag e 831 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software description Changes from the NTAK09 are required for th e new trunk card and License parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a c hange to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLA N ID. The download of PSDL data is also changed to han[...]

Page 832 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 1 78 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate TMDI Rx Tx OOS ACT RED YEL LBK CC DCH .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... MAINT RS232 Monitor Port[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Pag e 833 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Microprocessor The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle th e following m ajor tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task executi on to maintain real-time task ordering co[...]

Page 834 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 D-channel interface The D-channel interface is a 64 kbps, full- duplex, serial bit- stream configured as a Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (D CE) device. The data signals include: • receive data output • transmit data input T able 26 3 Digital pad va lues and[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Pag e 835 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • receive clock output • transmit clock output The bit rate of the receive and transmit c locks can vary slightly from each other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. Feature selection th rough softw are configuration for t he D-ch[...]

Page 836 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Cross-connect – Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settin gs are shown in Table 264. Receiver The receiver extracts data and clock fr om an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst cas[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Pag e 837 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Connector pinout The connection to the external dig ital carrier is through a 15 positio n Male D-type connector. NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard Digital Trunking requires synchro nized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equiva[...]

Page 838 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different COs, if th e COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. Clock rate conv erter The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL synchronizes[...]

Page 839 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 844 NTVQ01xx Media Card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 Hardware architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 840 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 1 79 NTVQ01xx Media Card The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and back plane interfaces, which are used to connect external LA Ns. This section provides informat ion on the faceplate conn ectors and indicators.[...]

NTVQ01xx Media Card Page 841 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Hardware architecture The Media Card comes in two vers ions: 8-por t and 32-port. Faceplate connectors and indicators Figure 180 on page 842 shows the NTVQ01xx Me dia Card faceplate. Reset swit ch The reset switch on the faceplate manually resets the Media Card. Status LE[...]

Page 842 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 1 80 NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate HEX Display Maintenance Port Ethernet Activity LEDs PCMCIA Slot Reset Button MC Enable LED Lock Latches J2 A: 100 10 A E T Reset NTVQ01AA 553-MIRAN0001[...]

NTVQ01xx Media Card Page 843 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation RS-232 Asynchronou s Maintenance Port An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NT VQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the Media Card for OA&M purposes. The maintena nce port is also available through a femal[...]

Page 844 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 845 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 850 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 846 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description Figure 181 on page 847 shows the ITG-P card f aceplate components. The information in this section describes the components. Faceplate components NWK The faceplate connector labeled NWK is a 9-pin, sub-miniature D-type connector. The connector is[...]

NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Page 847 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 18 1 NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management interface. ITG-P NWK NTVQ55AA NWK Status Reset Maint Port A: 553-CSE9150 Ethernet Voice Port ITG-P LED (card status) NWK LEDs (Ethernet) Reset Switch Type III P[...]

Page 848 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NWK Status LED NWK Status LEDs display the TLAN interface card Ethernet activity: • Green – on if the carrier (link pulse) is received from the TLAN interface card Ethernet hub. • Yellow – flashes when there is TL AN interface card data activity. During heavy t[...]

NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Page 849 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • alternate connection to th e serial maintenanc e port DS-30X • Card LAN interfaces DS-30X voic e/signaling DS-30X carries Pulse Code Modul ation (PCM) voice and proprietary signaling on the backplane betw een the ITG-P card and the SSC. Card LAN Card LAN carri[...]

Page 850 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 851 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 868 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 852 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Each system can accommodate up to ei ght ESDI cards, for a total of 16 synchronous ports per system. The ESDI cards can be housed in the network slots of any of the following mo dules: • NT5D21 Core /Network mod ule (slots 0 t hrough 7) • NT6D39 CP[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 853 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 1 82 CPC513 ESDI card front panel LED Card lock latch Card lock latch 553-5981 CSL/ ESDI Q P C 5 1 3 ENB DIS J1 J2 ESDI port 2 connector ESDI port 1 connector Enable/disable switch[...]

Page 854 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelli gent, two-port synchronous serial data interface card. See Figure 183. The tw o serial input/output data ports terminate on DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the card. Each port operates in[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 855 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelli gent controller. The local micro-processor performs all of the overhead associated with synchronous data transfer. The system processor passes data to the ESDI card processor a byte at a tim e using convention al m[...]

Page 856 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Clock timing option The ESDI card offers two timing options: • Internal: The ESDI card uses an in ternal timing source to synchron ize data transfers to the external device. • External: The ESDI card accepts a ti ming source from the high-speed int[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 857 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Fault detection Firmware on the ESDI card detects hardwa re faults o n the card and lin k level LAPB protocol faults. It reports the faults to the CPU when predetermined thresholds (downloaded at initiali zation) have been exceeded. Fault isolation [...]

Page 858 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Electrical inte rface options Interface options are selected by inserti ng jumper plugs into the appropriate sockets on the card: • RS-232-C interface: The EIA RS-232-C interface can be used for speeds up to 19.2 kbp s and distances of less than 15.2[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 859 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Connector pin assignments Table 268 shows t he pin assignments for J1 and J2 when the port is configured for RS-232-C interface, and Table 269 on page 860 shows the pin assignments for J1 an d J2 when the port is configured for the high-speed interf[...]

Page 860 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 17 Receiver signal element timing (DCE) — 3 DD 24 T ransmitter signal element timing (DTE) 3 — DA Ta b l e 2 6 9 Connector J1 and J2 pin assignment s – high-speed interface (P ar t 1 of 2) Pin nu mber Signal functions Signal source EIA circ uit ([...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 861 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Timing 12 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DTE) – lead B — 3 DD (B) 14 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DCE) – lead B — 3 DB (B) 15 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DCE) – lead A — 3 DB (A) 17 T ransmitter signal element t[...]

Page 862 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring the ESDI card Configuring the ESDI card consists of setting the port addresses using the address selection switch and setting the port in terface options using the jumper blocks. The system software must then be configured to recognize the [...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 863 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DTE/DCE mode ju mper settin gs The interface for each ESDI port is conf igured independently. Ports must be configured both for electrical interf ace (RS-232-C or high-speed) and mode (DTE or DCE). With the proper options set: • An ESDI port confi[...]

Page 864 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 18 5 ESDI card option switch location s 553-5983 S1 S2 DS1 J1 J2 UB9 UB10 UB11 UB12 UA9 UA10 UA11 UA12 UB16 UB17 UB18 UB19 UA16 UA17 UA18 UA19 Address selection Note: Ports 1 and 2 shown with jumper plugs installed for DCE and RS-232-C operation[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 865 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes All of the other ESDI port operating param eters are defined in software and downloaded to the assigned ESDI port . See Table 266 on page 855 . These changes are made using the Configurati on Record program (LD 17). Instruct[...]

Page 866 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 parameters. These parameters must be set for each ports if both ports are being used. LD 17 – Serial port config uration paramet ers. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change configuration. TYPE: CFN Configuration type. IO TB YES Chan ge input/out[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 867 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Applications The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data In terface card is used any time that a high-speed, ful ly synchronous serial dat a communication channel is needed. The ESDI card is typically used to connect to the following: • Meridia n Mail • A h[...]

Page 868 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 18 6 QPC513 ESDI card ca bling Cables to peripherals NT8D95 cables (Note 1) NT8D82 cables I/O panel Module front Q P C 5 1 3 J1 J2 Port 2 Port 1 Card front panel Backplane Filter adapters (Note 2) Meridian Mail Meridian Link : 553-5984 Note 1: T[...]

Page 869 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 884 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 870 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QSDI cards are housed in the following modules: • NT5D21 Core /Network mod ule (slots 0 t hrough 7) • NT6D39 CPU/Network mod ule (slots 1 through 9, and 13) • NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 throu gh 5) • NT8D35 Netw ork module (slots 5 thro ugh 13) ?[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 871 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 1 87 QPC841 QSDI card front panel LED Card lock latch Card lock latch 553-5985 ENB DIS J1 J2 Ports 2, 3, and 4 connector (non-standard) Port 1 connector (RS-232C) Enable/disable switch QPC841 QSDI[...]

Page 872 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for fo ur asynchronous serial ports, including th e baud rate generators. These serial ports are directly accessed by the syst em processor using memory reads and writ[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 873 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 18 8 QPC841 QSDI card block diagram UART no. 1 UART no. 2 UART no. 3 UART no. 4 UARTs Address decode logic TD RD TD RD TD RD TD RD RS-232-C drivers and receivers Clock and bit rate select logic Processor bus 553-5986 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 J[...]

Page 874 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connector pin assignments Connector J1 is connected to po rt one, and uses the RS-232-C standard DB-25 pinout. Connector J2 is connected to ports two, three, and fo ur, and is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable (NT8D96 )[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 875 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T able 27 4 Connector J2 pin assignments (Part 1 of 2) Pin Number Po r t Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 1 FGD F rame ground F rame ground 2 TD T ransmitted data T ransmitted data 3 RD Received data Received data 4 RT S Request to send (n[...]

Page 876 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring the QSDI card Configuring the QSDI card consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: • Port addr ess • Baud rate • DTE/DCE mode Figure 189 on page 880 shows the location of the option sw itches on the QSDI card. Instruc[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 877 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation select the addresses for ports 1 and 2. Switch SW15 is used to select the addresses for ports 3 and 4. T able 27 5 QSDI card ad dress switch settings SW14 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 Switch sett ings SW15 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 12345678 Device pair addresses 0 1 off o[...]

Page 878 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Baud rate swit ch settings Table 276 lists t he switch sett ings necessary to set the baud rat e. Ta b l e 2 7 6 QSDI card baud rate switch settings Baud rate P ort 1 – SW10 P or t 2 – SW 11 P or t 3 – SW12 P or t 4 – SW13 1234123412341234 150 off [...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 879 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DTE/DCE mod e switch settings Table 277 shows the DTE/DCE mode sel ection switches for the four serial ports. Test swi tch setti ng Switch SW16 is only used for fact ory testing; all of its switches must be set to OFF for proper operation. T able 27 7 Q[...]

Page 880 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 18 9 QSDI card optio n switch loca tions 553-5987 SW1 DS1 J1 J2 SW16 12 34 O N 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 3 4 O N 12 34 O N 123 4 O N 12 34 O N 12 3 4 O N 56 78 12 34 O [...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 881 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be config ured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructi ons for running the Configuration Reco[...]

Page 882 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The QPD841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card is used to connect the switch to a variety of commu nication devices and peripherals. Any RS-232 -C compatible device can be connected to any of the four serial ports. The standard application [...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 883 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • SDI multiple-por t cable (internal system options use only) —N T 8 D 9 0 • SDI I/O to DTE/DCE cables (system options use only) —N T 8 D 9 5 Note: This cable is av ailable in di f fer ent lengths. Refer to Equipment Identif ication (553-3001-15[...]

Page 884 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 885 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 900 The TDS/DTR card Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 886 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Features Tone transmitter The TDS/DTR tone transmi tter provides 30 channels of tone transmission. Up to 256 tones are available as u-La w or A-Law and up to 256 bursts and cadences are downloaded from the CPU. The TDS/DTR card does not provide the Music on Hold feat ure as do [...]

The TDS/DTR card Pag e 887 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Tones and cadences The following tables give the tones and cadences provid ed by the NTAK03 TDS/DTR card. T able 27 8 NT AK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-La w tones and cadence (P art 1 of 6) To n e # Frequency (Hz) dB bel ow o verload Precision Ringing To n e s DTMF Digits MF D[...]

Page 888 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 19 770/1340 -12/-10 5 20 770/1480 -12/-10 6 21 850/1210 -12/-10 7 22 850/1340 -12/-10 8 23 850/1480 -12/-10 9 24 940/1340 -12/-10 0 25 940/1210 -12/-10 * 26 940/1480 -12/-10 # 27 700/1630 -12/-10 Fo 28 770/1630 -12/-10 F 29 850/1630 -12/-10 I 30 reser ved 31 reser ved 32 reser [...]

The TDS/DTR card Pag e 889 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 39 770/1210 -17/-15 4 40 770/1340 -17/-15 5 41 770/1480 -17/-15 6 42 850/1210 -17/-15 7 43 850/1340 -17/-15 8 44 850/1480 -17/-15 9 45 940/1340 -17/-15 0 46 940/1210 -17/-15 * 47 940/1480 -17/-15 # 48 700/1630 -17/-15 Fo 49 770/1630 -17/-15 F 50 850/1630 -17/-15 I 51 reser [...]

Page 890 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 60 700/1500 -13/-13 7 61 900/1500 -13/-13 8 62 1100/1500 -13/-13 9 63 700/1700 -13/-13 ST3P/RB/ C11 64 900/1700 -13/-13 STP/C12 65 1100/1700 -13/-13 KP/CR/KP1 66 1300/1700 -13/-13 ST2P/KP2 67 1500/1700 -13/-13 ST/CC 68 400 -11 ÷ 69 400 -14 ÷ 70 400 x 50 -14 ÷ 71 (533 + 666) [...]

The TDS/DTR card Pag e 891 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 80 480 -19 ÷ 81 420 -9 ÷ 82 440 -29 ÷ 83 reser ved 84 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 85 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 86 400 -17 ÷ 87 1400 -26 ÷ 88 950 -12 ÷ 89 1400 -12 ÷ 90 1800 -12 ÷ 91 470 0 ÷ 92 940 0 ÷ 93 1300 0 ÷ 94 1500 0 ÷ 95 1880 0 ÷ 96 350/440 -10/-10 97 TBD 98 TBD 99 TBD [...]

Page 892 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Tones #1 - 16 (inclusive) and #234 - 249 (inclusive) are incl uded for Norwegian and Malaysian specifications. 101 600 -19 ÷ 102 800 -19 ÷ 103 1400 -23 ÷ 104 820 -7 Ta b l e 2 7 9 NT AK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 1 of 9) To n e # F requency (H[...]

The TDS/DTR card Pag e 893 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 * 13 940 X 1480 -14/-13 # 14 700 X 1630 -14/-13 F0 15 770 X 1630 -14/-13 F 16 850 X 1630 -14/-13 I 17 1400 -37 89 940/1630 -13/-12 P 90 700/1210 -13/-12 1 91 700/1340 -13/-12 2 92 700/1480 -13/-12 3 93 770/1210 -13/-12 4 94 770/1340 -13/-12 5 95 770/14[...]

Page 894 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 104 850/1630 -13/-12 I 105 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 106 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 107 1400 -26 ÷ 108 440 -23 ÷ 109 420 -9 ÷ 110 950 -12 ÷ 111 1400 -12 ÷ 112 1800 -12 ÷ 113 940/1630 -12/-10 P 114 700/1210 -12/-10 1 115 700/1340 -12/-10 2 116 700/1480 -12/-10 3 117 770/1210 -12/-10 4 11[...]

The TDS/DTR card Pag e 895 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 125 940/1480 -12/-10 # 126 700/1630 -12/-10 F0 127 770/1630 -12/-10 F 128 850/1630 -12/-10 I 129 350/440 -22/-22 ÷ 130 400 -19 ÷ 131 400 -25 ÷ 132 400/450 -22/-22 ÷ 133 1400 -15 ÷ 134 950 -19 ÷ 135 1400 -20 ÷ 136 1800 -20 ÷ 137 420 -19 ÷ 138 940/1630 -18/-17 P 139 [...]

Page 896 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 146 850/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 8 147 850/1480 -18/-17 ÷ 9 148 940/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 0 149 940/1210 -18/-17 ÷ * 150 940/1480 -18/-17 ÷ # 151 700/1630 -18/-17 F0 152 770/1630 -18/-17 F 153 850/1630 -18/-17 I 154 (533 + 666) X 10 -23 ÷ 155 (533 + 666) X 20 -23 ÷ 156 400 -12 ÷ 157 820[...]

The TDS/DTR card Pag e 897 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 167 1700 -19 ÷ 168 440 -14 ÷ 169 380 -8 ÷ 170 1400 -32 ÷ 171 820 -7 P 172 850 -8 1 173 420 -32 2 174 reser ved 3 175 420 -6 4 176 420 -2 5 177 1020 -13 6 178 1800 -17 7 179 1400 -23 8 180 950 -29 9 181 1400 -29 0 182 1800 -29 * 183 950 -22 # 184 470 0 F0 185 940 0 F 186[...]

Page 898 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 188 420 X 25 -17 189 950 -16 190 950 -25 191 940/1630 -9/-7 192 700/1210 -9/-7 193 700/1340 -9/-7 194 700/1480 -9/-7 195 770/1210 -9/-7 196 770/1340 -9/-7 197 770/1480 -9/-7 198 850/1210 -9/-7 199 850/1340 -9/-7 200 850/1480 -9/-7 201 940/1340 -9/-7 202 940/1210 -9/-7 203 940/1[...]

The TDS/DTR card Pag e 899 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 209 420 -4 210 1400 -18 211 1400 -9 212 350/420 -9/-9 213 420 -14 214 450 -12 215 450 -22 216 820 -16 217 350/420 -14/-14 218 940/1630 -14/-12 219 700/1210 -14/-12 220 700/1340 -14/-12 221 700/1480 -14/-12 222 770/1210 -14/-12 223 770/1340 -14/-12 224 770/1480 -14/-12 225 8[...]

Page 900 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 230 940/1480 -14/-12 231 700/1630 -14/-12 232 770/1630 -14/-12 233 850/1630 -14/-12 234 940 X 1630 -17/-15 p 235 700 X 1210 -17/-15 1 236 700 X 1340 -17/-15 2 237 700 X 1480 -17/-15 3 238 770 X 1210 -17/-15 4 239 770 X 1340 -17/-15 5 240 770 X 1480 -17/-15 6 241 850 X 1210 -17/[...]

Page 901 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 906 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Contents This section contains infor mation on the follow ing topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 902 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link C ontrol protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 LAPB subset of the HDLC protocol and tr ansmitted serially to the line at a rate determined by the dow nloaded parameters. The QPC513 card receives data serially from the line, packaged in LAPB information frames. Aft er determining th at a block is [...]

Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Pag e 903 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation LAPB balanced class of procedure Applications which use port s on the QPC513 are automaticall y designated as BAC, 2, 8 (for ex ample, balanced operatio n, asynchronous balanced mo de class of procedure with optional fu nctions 2 and 8 implemented[...]

Page 904 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link C ontrol protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Asynchronous Ba lanced Mode Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM) is a balanced, confi gured operational mode in which either combined statio n may send commands at any time and may initiate certain response fram e transmissions wi thout receiving permiss[...]

Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Pag e 905 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Description of procedure The basic LAPB procedures must be implemented to satisfy the following: • standard use of the poll/fin al bit (for more information, see ISO-4375-1979-[E]) • exception condition reporting and recovery implemented in ac[...]

Page 906 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link C ontrol protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

[...]

F am ily Product Manual Contac ts Copyright FCC no tice T rademarks Docu ment numbe r Product re lease Docume nt release Date Pub lish Nor tel Communication Se r ver 1000 Cir cuit Card Descr iption and Installation Cop yright © N or tel Networks Limite d 2005 All Rights Reser v ed Inf or mation is subject to change without notice. Nor tel Networks[...]